Service Manual v3.0

Order Number: MGCS031201C0J7

FacsimileUF-9000

DP-180/190

[ Version 3.0 ]

This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

© 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution isa violation of law.

The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.Published in Japan.

Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:

Distinction of PbF PCB:PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.

Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:

URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.

This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).

2

http://www.senju-m.co.jp

3

Important NoticePlease read this notice completely BEFORE repairing or installing any optional accessories. As failure to properly install the additional board or connector with the power ON could damage the machine’s SPC or SC board.Please follow the instructions below:1. It is essential that you turn OFF the Main Power Switch located on the Left Side of the machine.2. It is essential that you unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)3. Please read the installation instructions carefully and follow each step. <Example: UF-9000>

Note:O = Power OFF, l = Power ON

Note:If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from beingperformed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit and advances into "ENERGY SAVER MODE".4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position.5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.

4

Precautions

Power and Ground Connection CautionsEnsure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminatedconnector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventuallycause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.

Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord isrequired, always use a properly rated cord.

120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 AIf you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke orbecome hot to the touch.

Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do notplace a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.

If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric

Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, orabnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic .

Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug andcause fire.

When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cordforcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.

When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulationcan cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.

Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machinefor cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can causeelectric shock.

For Your SafetyTo prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonicmachine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.

This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedurethat must not be performed.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedurethat must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.

WARNING

Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.

shocks.

dealer.

5

Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusualcondition, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer.

The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.The plug and receptacle are free of dust.The cord is not cracked or frayed.

Operating SafeguardsDo not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may causesevere burns.

Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire orshock hazard.

Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into themachine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.

If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.

Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can causesmoke or fire.

Consumable SafeguardsNever dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in thecartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.

Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,get medical treatment immediately.

Installation and Relocation CautionsDo not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains thatmay catch fire.

Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure tothese adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.

Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine. The weight of the machine : 43.6 kg / 96.12 lbIf tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with thepower cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machinee with properpacking materials for shipping.

6

Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate themachine accidentally resulting in injuries.

Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.

When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against thedocument glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.

Never touch a labeled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheetof paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it when it is hot, to avoidinjuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbonic paper and coated paper. Whena paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.

Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over orthe heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.

Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time tominimize the ozone density in the air.

When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.

When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in themachine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper iswrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult orimpossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries orburns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

CAUTION

Consumable Safeguards

Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge cancause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Never throw toner or a waste toner container or a toner cartridge into an open flame. Itcan cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Keep button batteries out of the reach of children. If a button battery is swallowedaccidentally, get medical treatment immediately.

Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can behazardous to your health.

Do not mix new and old batteries together. Otherwise, batteries can burst or leak,causing fire or injuries.

Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only.

Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries canburst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.

WARNING

CAUTION

Table of Contents

Specifications Table...................................91.1. Control Panel ............................................91.2. Copy Function.........................................111.3. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax

Functions ................................................191.4. System Combination...............................291.5. Options List.............................................301.6. External View..........................................321.7. Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan ......361.8. Sensors and PC Boards .........................36

Disassembly Instructions .........................372.1. General Disassembly..............................372.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................382.3. Hardware Identification Template ...........69

Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points.......................................................71

3.1. Preventive Maintenance .........................713.2. Required Tools .......................................733.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ..............743.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .......753.5. Updating the Firmware ...........................763.6. Adjusting the Printer Registration,

LSU Image Side to Side .........................86

Troubleshooting .......................................884.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............884.2. Improper LCD Display ............................894.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems...............904.4. Document Feeder (ADF) ......................1064.5. Communications ...................................1094.6. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......1154.7. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................1234.8. Information Code Table

(For Facsimile)......................................1304.9. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........1374.10. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................144

Service Modes .......................................1465.1. Service Modes (For Copier)..................1465.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............163

System Description................................1946.1. Scanning / Transmit Mechanism ..........1946.2. Control Panel ........................................1956.3. Printer / Receive Mechanism................196

6.4. Signal Waveform.................................. 203

Installation ............................................. 2557.1. Set Up Precautions .............................. 2557.2. Unpacking ............................................ 2577.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 258

Options and Supplies ............................ 2648.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update"

for PCL or PS Option Installation ......... 2648.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module

for PCL6 (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190)...................... 272

8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190) ..................... 274

8.4. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD19) ........................................... 276

8.5. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600) ......................................... 284

8.6. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B) ...................... 286

8.7. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)............................ 288

8.8. Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module (DA-DS188).......................................... 289

8.9. Installing the Handset Kit (UE-403171/UE-403172) ..................... 293

8.10. Installing the Mechanical Counter Kit (DZTQ000066) ..................................... 294

General Network Information................. 2979.1. Network Protocol .................................. 2979.2. Layer Functions and Technology ......... 2999.3. Network Layer ...................................... 3039.4. Transport Layer .................................... 3079.5. Upper Layer ......................................... 3099.6. SMTP

(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 3149.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305........................ 3159.8. Communication Protocols .................... 3219.9. POP

(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 3249.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 3279.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail

Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 3289.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) - Extended Feature................. 329

7

Table of Contents

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature ...................332

9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................336

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature ...............................336

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature ...............................338

9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature ...............................340

Schematic Diagram ...............................34210.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................342

8

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1 Specifications Table1.1. Control Panel

<Navy Blue Control Panel>

For USA only

Panafax UF-9000

For Americas

WORKiO DP-190

For Euro and Other Destinations

WORKiO DP-180

9APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
<Light Blue Control Panel>For USA only

Panafax UF-9000

For Americas

WORKiO DP-190

For Euro and Other Destinations

WORKiO DP-180

Note:LCD Display Brightness Adjustment

To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.

ORIGINAL SIZE : DimmerCOPY SIZE : Brighter

10APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.2. Copy Function

Copy Function

Items Description RemarksUF-9000 DP-180 / 190

Basic Specifications1 Type Desktop2 Platen Fixed3 Original Position

Platen Left / Rear / Face DownADF Left / Center / Face UP

4 Recording Paper Path Center5 Drum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)6 Copy Process Electrostatic Indirect Laser

7 Developing Process Mono Component Non Magnetic Dry Toner

8 Toner Recycle No9 Fusing System Heat & Pressure

10 Max Original Size Letter / A4 / Legal Legal: with ADF only11 Paper Size

Paper TrayLetter / Legal For USA and Canada

A4 / A5 For EUA4 / A5 / B5 For Other Destinations

Bypass

Letter / Legal / Invoice For USA and Canada

A4, FLS, A5 For EUFLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in

A4 / A5 / B5 / Postcard For Other Destinations12 Media Type

Standard Tray Paper / TransparencyOptional Tray Paper

Bypass Paper / Transparency / Envelope / Label / Thick Paper

13 Warm-up Time 68 °F (20 °C)Power Saver Mode Approx. 15 secSleep ModeShutdown Mode Approx. 18 secPower On

14 First Copy Time Approx. 10 sec

Scan: Platen; Size: Letter / A4; Orientation: Portrait;Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray; Interval: From Pressing of Start Key to paper exiting to the Exit Tray; When LSU is ready.

15 Copy SpeedLetter Approx. 19 cpm Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray;

Paper Exit: to Exit Tray; Continuous Copy Mode.A4 Approx. 18 cpm

11APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
16 ZoomEnlargement Selected Original size / Copy sizeReduction Selected Original size / Copy sizeZoom 50 - 200% 1% Step

17 Paper Feed Front Loading Universal Paper TrayPaper Tray

Capacity 250 sheets x 1 LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)

Low Level Paper Warning Yes Orange Low Paper Level Indicator

Bypass

Capacity 1 sheetPaper / Transparency / Envelope / Label / Thick Paper / Postcard etc.

Paper Capacity (Std. Configuration) 250 sheets

18 Multi Copy Range 999 sheets19 Gradation

Text Bi-LevelText / Photo 256 steps Halftone by Error DiffusionPhoto 256 steps

20 Resolution Scanning and Printing.Scan

Mono Max. 600 x 600 dpiColor Max. 300 x 300 dpi

Print (Mono) Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi

Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing, the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers (1200 dpi Interpolated).

21 Scanning typeColor Scan Yes

Color Depth 24 bit (16.7 Million colors)Mono Scan Yes

22 Standard Sorting Memory Size 16 MB

23 Standard Page Memory Size 32 MB24 Exit Tray Capacity 150 sheets LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)25 Dimensions

(W x D x H)

18.2 x 19.9 x 20.6 in (462 x 506 x 523 mm)18.2 x 19.9 x 26.1 in

(462 x 506 x 663 mm)With Optional 2nd Paper Feed Module

26 Operating Space

(W x D) 18.2 x 21.1 x 31.5 in (462 x 536 x 802 mm)

27 Weight 48.5 lb (22 kg)

Copy Function


12APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Options1 Paper Feed System 550 sheets x 1

550 sheets2nd Paper Feed Module Yes

Paper Size Detection Manual Control Panel Selectable

Low Level Paper Warning Yes Orange Low Paper Level Indicator

Max. Paper Capacity 800 sheets LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)(Tray 1 + 2)

2 Sorting Image MemoryOptional Image Memory 1 (16 MB) Yes Unit comes standard with

16 MB. 1-Slot available for an Optional Image Memory module.

Optional Image Memory 2 (64 MB) Yes

Optional Image Memory 3 (128 MB) Yes

3 Image MemoryExpansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB Yes

Image Memory for FacsimileExpansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB Yes

4 Expansion Board Yes Required for PCL and PS Printing.

5 Hard Disk Drive Yes 40 GB (2.5 inch)6 Handset Yes7 PCL Printer Yes Requires the Optional

Expansion Board.

8 PS / PCL Printer Yes Requires the Optional Expansion Board.

9 Accounting Software Yes For Accounting Function10 Deluxe Stand Yes11 Remote Diagnostic Software Yes12 Mechanical Counter Yes Supplied as a Service Part.

Features1 Automatic Features

Auto Magnification Selection NoAuto Paper Selection

Copy NoPrint Yes

Auto Paper Tray Selection Yes

Auto Start Yes Reservation while Power On Initializing

Normal Operation Mode 80 W Turns On the Heater Power.

Copy Function


13APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Energy Saver Mode

Power Saver Mode 20 W

Turns Off the Heater Power.Automatically enters the Sleep or Shutdown Mode after 15 minutes from the Standby or Energy Saver Mode.Manually enters the Energy Saver Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key.Sleep or Shutdown mode is controlled by the General Functions setting.

Sleep Mode 12 W (100 VAC PS)15 W (220 VAC PS)

Turns Off the Power of Printer & Scanner.

Shutdown Mode 1.5 W USB / Network Function not available

Transmission (ADF) 45 W (100 VAC PS)56 W (220 VAC PS)

Transmission (Platen) 40 W (100 VAC PS)50 W (220 VAC PS)

Reception / Copy 900 W (100 VAC PS)1000 W (220 VAC PS)

Max 900 W (100 VAC PS)1000 W (220 VAC PS)

Remote Diagnostic YesMachine Stops when Out of Toner Yes

2 Additional FeaturesLow Level Paper indicator YesPhoto Mode Yes 256 stepsOriginal Detection Release NoEdit / Effects

Book Mode NoEdge Mode NoMargin Mode NoX-Y Zoom NoInverse Mode (Negative / Positive) No

Centering Mode NoMirror Mode NoImage Repeat No

Copy Function


14APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Others (Inverting ADF & ADU)

2-Page Copy Mode No2 in 1 Yes4 in 1 YesBooklet Mode NoDuplex Copy

1→2 Yes2→1 Yes Scanning twice by turning

original.2→2 YesBook→2 No

Image Rotation (90 or 270 °) NoElectronic Sorting YesRotation Sorting NoInsertion Job NoDepartment Counter Yes 50 DepartmentsADF

Mixed Size Original Feed Yes* LTR and LGL, effective from June 2004 Production

JOB Build and SADF Mode No

Original Counter NoJob Memory No Yes (1 jobs)Job Time Display YesConcurrent Copy NoTandem Copy Mode NoRemote Copy Mode NoScan Once Print Many Mode YesJob Completion Notice Yes For Printer Mode onlyTrial Copy Mode NoWeekly Timer NoFunction Mode YesInterrupt NoElectronic Counter YesDigital Sky Shot Mode Yes

Check / Slip Mode(Double Exposure) Yes

Check : Dimensions of a Bank check

Slip : Dimensions of a Bank check with a statement

3 Control PanelDisplay LCD 20 digits x 2 lines

Status Lamp YesGREEN : Scanning /

PrintingRED : Alarm / Warning

Copy Function


15APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
KeyQWERTY Keyboard YesDirectory Search (4 way) YesOriginal Size YesCopy Size YesKeypad YesClear YesStop YesStart YesEnergy Saver YesSort / Finish NoFunction Mode YesOriginal Detection Release No

Interrupt NoReset YesOne-Touch key Yes

Mode Change Yes Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax and Internet Fax Mode

LCD Main Indication

Message Language (Default)

English (American) For USA and Canada

Specified Language For EU and Other Destinations

Original Size / Image Indication

Yes (without Image)

Paper Size / Image Indication

Yes (without Image)

Paper Tray Selection NoSelected Paper Tray / Tray Status Yes

Original Mode Selection Yes Text / Text-Photo / PhotoCopy Density Selection Yes 5 stepsSetting Confirmation YesFunction Classification YesZoom Magnification YesNumber of Copies YesError Code YesFinishing No

Copy Function


16APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Warning Indicators YesNo Toner YesNo Paper YesAdd Paper Indication Yes Mechanical IndicatorPaper Jam Indication YesPaper Jam Location YesService Alert Call YesUser Error YesMachine Error YesHistory of Jam Errors Yes

4 Main UnitTotal Counter

Electronic YesMechanical Yes (Optional) Mechanical Counter

Max. Weight of Documents on the Platen Glass 6.61 lb (3 kg)

ADF with Document Guide YesClip Pocket NoOperating Instructions Pocket No

Warning / Caution Label Specified Language5 Optical System

Original Size Detection NoScanning Method 600 dpi CCDDehumidifier No

6 Process System / Yield

Toner Cartridge

UG-5530 / DQ-UG16H / UG17H [Yield: 5 K (5% coverage), 6 K Max]Average yield is based on 5% coverage of the printable area with repetitive printing of 10 pages (Letter/A4 size, single side printing, default density). The yield of a Toner Cartridge varies depending on the coverage, temperature, humidity, media, etc. Therefore, the average yield cannot be guaranteed. Continuously printing 10% coverage of printable area will reduce the yield of the Toner Cartridge to about half as compared to 5% coverage printing. The maximum yield of the Toner Cartridge will not exceed 6,000 pages by way of Digital Counter.UG-5540 [Yield: 10 K (3% coverage), 11.5 K Max]DQ-UG26H/UG27H [Yield: 6K (5% coverage), 11.5 K Max] The maximum yield of the Toner Cartridge will not exceed 11,500 pages by way of Digital Counter.(See sect.1.5.)

Copy Function


17APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Efficiency1 Productivity

ADF Through-put Speed Approx. 50%ADU Copy Productivity(LTR / A4)

1→2

10 copies More than 50%

Throughput when the LSU is ready; Paper is fed from the 1st Paper Tray and is ejected to the Exit Tray.

PM Cycle1 PM Cycle

Major PM 85 K (Printer), 50K (ADF) Refer to Section 3.4Minor PM (Cleaning) 10 K (ADF)

2 Average Copy Volume 1.5 K Monthly3 Max. Copy Volume 10 K

Packing Configuration

1 Packing Dimension 24.3 x 29.3 x 26.4 in(616 x 745 x 670 mm)

2 Packing Weight 63.9 lb (29 kg)3 Accessories

Process Unit YesOperating Instructions Yes

Power Supply

1 Power Requirement

99 - 132 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Single phase 120 VAC

180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Single phase 220 - 240 VAC

2 Power Consumption Max. 900WAmbient Conditions

1 Temperature 50 - 80 °F / 10 - 30 °C2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%RH

3 SafetyUL60950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.60950-1 For USA and Canada

EN60950-1 For EU and Other Destinations

4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant

5 EMI Class B computing device peripheral in FCC Rules Part 15 For USA and Canada

6 Lead Free Solder (PbF) This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) PCBs

Refer to the inner Front Cover and the Parts Manual for details

Copy Function


18APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.3. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions1.3.1. Fax Function

Fax Function


Main Specifications1 Compatibility Super G3 / G3 ITU-T Std & Non-Std2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line only3 Leased Line Port No4 V.24 Line Port No5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4kbps T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter6 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM

8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)

9 Transmission Speed LTR : Approx. 2.7 secA4 : Approx. 2.9 sec

ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std Resolution)

10Communication Resolution dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm)

Transmission Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

Reception Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

600 dpi communication is only possible between T.30 Compliant Panafax, WORKiO, and other T.30 compliant machines.

Scanner Mechanism1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)

2 Scanning Resolution /SpeedStd: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm)

LTR : 2.7 sec LTR : 2.7 secA4 : 2.9 sec

Excludes: Initializing Time, ADF slipping factor, and Data XMT Time.

(Letter size for USA and Canada; A4 size for Other Destinations)

Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm)S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm)600dpi: 600 x 600

3 Document Size (Max.) Legal216 x 2000 mm Using ADF only

4 Effective Scanning Width LTR : 8.3 in (212 mm)A4 : 8.2 in (207 mm)

(Letter size for USA and Canada; A4 size for Other Destinations)

5 ADF Capacity 50 sheets Face Up, top feedLTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m2)

19APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6 Collation Stack Yes Face DownPrinter Mechanism

1 Recording Method LP

2 Recording Speed Approx. 19 ppm Recording Speed attained after the 1st copy.

3 Recording Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi

4 Recording Paper Size Legal / Letter Legal / LetterA4 / A5 Invoice: Not supported.

5 Effective Printing Width LTR : 8.1 in (207mm)

LTR : 8.1 in (207mm)

A4 : 7.9 in (201 mm)

Letter : USA and CanadaA4 : Other Destinations

6 Recording Paper Capacity 250 sheets Tray 1 + 2 : Max. 800 sheetsLTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)

7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down

8 Consumable All in One Cartridge

Drum Unit and Toner

Fax Memory

1 Standard Memory 2 MB Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)

2 Optional Memory 4 MB8 MB

Expansion Flash Memory Card, using ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)

Dual Operation1 Multi Task Operation Yes2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes

4 Number of Memory Job Files Yes Max. 50 files

Dialing/Telephone Features1 One-Touch Keys 322 One-Touch / Program Keys 83 One-Touch Auto Dialers 404 Abbr. Auto Dialers 160

5 Total Auto Dialers 200

Plus an additional 800 stations available to select from, when the optional Hard Disk Drive is installed.

6 Directory Search Dialing Yes7 Program Dials 88 Max. Tel Number Digits 36

9 Max. Station Name Characters 15

10 Full Number Dialing (Buffered Dialing) Yes Max. 50 stations

11 Direct Dialing(Monitor Dialing) Yes Voice mode

Fax Function


20APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
12 Automatic Redialing Yes Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min. intervals

13 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button

14 Line Monitor Speaker Yes15 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only16 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF17 Pulse to Tone Change No18 Flash Key Yes19 Handset Option

Transmission Features1 Direct Transmission Yes2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission

3 Quick Memory Transmission Yes

4 Multi-Station Transmission (Sequential Broadcasting) Yes

Max. 250 stations(200 One-Touch / Abbr. + 50 Full Number Dialing)

5 Direct Deferred Transmission No ADF Deferred Transmission

6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max. 50 timers

7 Deferred Multi-Station Transmission Yes

8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes Priority ADF Transmission

9 Priority Memory Transmission No

10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)

11 90 Degree Rotation Transmission No

12 Cover Sheet Yes13 Confidential Mail Box No14 Multi-Copy Transmission No

15 Memory Back-Up Yes

FAX: Back-up with Flash Memory.

Copy / Printer: No Back-up with D-RAM

16 Duplex Scanning NoReception Features

1 Substitute Reception Yes

2 Fixed Reduction YesLTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment

3 Auto Reduction YesLTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment

4 Overlap Printing Yes Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)

5 Receive to Memory Yes

Fax Function


21APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6 Distinctive Ring Detector (DRD) Yes Specified Destinations only

7 90 Degree Rotation Reception No

8 Duplex Printing YesPolling

1 Polling Yes2 Turnaround Polling No3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 250 stations4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 timers

5 Deferred Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 50 timers / 250 stations

6 Direct Polling Tx No7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File8 Preset Polling Password Yes

9 Temporary Polling Password Yes

10 Continuous Polling YesConvenience

1 Panel Display Yes2 Voice Contact No3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes

Certainty1 Verification Stamp Yes2 Header / Total Page Print Yes

3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions / with View Mode

4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes

Printout Lists1 One-Touch List Yes2 ABBR. No. List Yes3 Program List Yes4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List5 Fax Parameter List Yes6 File List Yes With View Mode7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes8 Directory Sheet Yes

Identifications1 Logo Yes 25 Characters2 Multiple Logo No3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits

Fax Function


22APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Special Communications1 Password XMT / RCV Yes2 Selective Reception Yes TSI Check3 Relay XMT Request No4 Relay XMT Center No5 Confidential XMT / Polling No6 Confidential Center No7 Mailbox XMT / Polling Yes8 Mailbox Center Yes Max.10 Mail Boxes9 File XMT No

10 Received Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer 11 Sub-address XMT Yes T. Routing 12 Sub-address Auto Routing Yes13 NYSE Yes For USA and Canada only14 Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes iFAX → iFAX → G3FAX15 Email Relay XMT Yes PC → iFAX → G3FAX16 Panafax Desktop Yes

Standards

1 PSTNFCC Part 68 / Industry Canada

No. CS-03: Issue 8 For USA and Canada

TBR21 For EUOthers

1 Fax Access Code Yes2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 5 Files4 Department Code Yes 50 Departmental Codes5 Power Saver Mode Yes6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes

7 Remote Diagnostic Function Yes Specific Destinations only

8 Check & Call Function Yes9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No

Fax Function


23APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.3.2. Printer Function

Printer Function


Interface1 Centronics Parallel I/F No

2 LAN (Network) Yes Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX

3 USB Port Yes USB1.14 IEEE-1394 No Firewire

Printer Function1 Printing Size LGL / LTR LGL / LTR /

A4 / A5 / B52 Bypass Yes3 Stapling No

4 Printing Resolution (dpi) Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi

Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing, the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers (1200 dpi Interpolated).

5 Interface USB / Ethernet

6 OS Win 98 / Win Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.1 MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only.

7 Printer Work Memory Size 20 MB Not expandable8 GDI Yes

9 PDL (PCL6) YesRequires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board.

10 PDL (PS3) YesRequires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board.

11 Duplex Printing Yes Custom Size/Postcard Size is not available.

12 Collation Stack Yes13 Status Monitor

Network YesUSB No

14 Network Status Monitor Yes15 Smoothing Yes16 Applicable PC IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC MAC is PS only.17 Multi-Task Operation

Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory Yes

Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Yes

Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Yes

Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing Yes

24APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
18 Output to separate tray for Printing, Fax, Copy No

19 Font Yes Requires Optional PCL6 or PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit

20 Mailbox Yes

Requires Optional HDD Unit.Max. 100 Users.Max. 20 mailboxes for each User ID

21 Secure Mailbox Yes

Requires Optional HDD Unit.Max. 100 Users.Max. 20 mailboxes for eachUser ID

Printer Function


25APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.3.3. Network Scanner Function

Network Scanner Function

Items Description RemarksUF-9000 / DP-180/190

Interface1 Centronics Parallel I/F No2 LAN (Network) Yes Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX3 USB Port No4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire

Network Scanning Function1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)2 Scanning Speed (ADF)

Mono LTR: 2.7 secA4 : 2.9 sec

600 dpi(Data XMT time is not included.)

Color LTR: 11 secA4 : 12 sec

300 dpi(Data XMT time is not included.)

3 Halftone 256 Halftone shades, Color 24bit, 16670 K With Error Diffusion

4 Max. Document Size Legal216 x 2000 mm Using ADF only

5 Scanning Resolution(dpi)

Mono600 x 600300 x 300150 x 150

Default: 300 dpi

Color300 x 300150 x 150

75 x 75Default: 150 dpi

6 OS Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP

7 2-Sided Scanning No8 File Format

Mono Multi-page TIFF / PDFColor JPEG / PDF

9 Completion Notice Yes Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen 10 Protocol TCP/IP / Non-Std

Network Address Features

1 One Touch Address Keys 40 Shared with Fax/I-Fax One-Touch Address, 40 in Total

2 Abbr. Address Numbers 60 Independent for Network Scanner

26APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.3.4. Internet Fax Function

Internet Fax Function


Main Specifications1 Communication Protocols SMTP / POP3 / MIME2 Max. Modem Speed NA3 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

4 File Format TIFF / JPEG or PDF

Selectable(PDF & JPEG formats are used for Scan-to-Email, current I-Fax standards do not support these file formats)

5 Line Interface RJ-45 Ethernet LANScanner Mechanism

1 Max. Document Size Legal216 x 2000 mm With the ADF only

2 Effective Scanning Width LTR : 8.3 in (212 mm)A4 : 8.2 in (207 mm)

Letter size: for USA and CanadaA4 size : for Other Destinations

3 Scanning Resolutiondpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/mm)

Std : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

: 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi

LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is available.

Printer Mechanism1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi

2 Effective Recording Width LTR : 8.1 in (207 mm)A4 : 7.9 in (201 mm)

Transmission Features

1 Multi-Task Operation Yes Convenient simultaneous G3 Fax and LAN operation.

2 Memory Transmission Yes

3 Sequential Multi-Station Transmission Yes

4 Simultaneous Multi-Station Transmission Yes

Max. 250 stations(200 One-Touch / Abbr. + 50 Full Number Dialing)

5 Sender Selection Yes

6 G3 / Email Mixed Broadcasting Yes

7 Deferred Transmission Yes8 Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer9 Sub-address RCV Yes Inbound Routing

10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Yes All or From / To / Subject onlySubject Line Random Entry

27APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
LAN Features1 Internet Fax Communication Yes2 Internet Mail Reception Yes3 Internet Fax Server Features

Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes iFAX → iFAX → G3FAXEmail Relay XMT Yes PC → iFAX → G3FAXReceived Fax / Email Forward Yes Local print available

PC FAX Transmission Yes Panafax Desktop Only (Network)

Inbound Routing Yes Using Sub-Address. Local print available

Phone Book Registration from PC Yes Via Email or Network Address Editor

4 I-Fax Parameters Registration via Email Yes

5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN 6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi7 Network Printing

LPR / LPD Yes 600 dpiGDI Yes 600 dpi

PDL YesRequires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board.

8 DHCP Client Yes9 LDAP Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer11 NYSE Yes For USA and Canada only

Certainty1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes

ID1 Email Address Yes

Internet Fax Function


28APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.4. System Combination

Scanner Unit (SPC PC Board)

Expansion FlashMemory Card

4 or 8MB

Main PC Board

Image Memory

(1-Slot)

Electronic Sorting Memory

2nd Paper Feed Module Option

Option

Standard Configuration

Panel(PNL PC Board)

MechanicalCounter Option

Handset KitOption

16, 64 or 128MB

Hard DiskDrive Option

Accounting Software Option

PCL6 Emulation Option

PS/PCL6 Emulation Option

USBInterface

GDI Printer

10/100 EthernetInterface

Super G3 Fax Communication

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Automatic Duplex Unit

Internet Fax/E-Mail

NetworkScanner

Program Expansion Board

8MB

29APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.5. Options List Options

Note:PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.PostScript 3 (PS3) is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.The Part Name(s) / Part Number(s) differ depending on the Models and the Destinations.

Option Name Option Number Remarks

Printer Controller Module (PCL6*) DA-PC188 For DP-180/190DA-PC190 For UF-9000

Multi Page Description Language Controller Module (PCL6/PostScript 3*)

DA-MC188 For DP-180/190DA-MC190 For UF-9000

Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD19

Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory (Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard Disk Drive to function. (PS additional fonts, Mail Box, additional 800 addresses, etc.)

Expansion Board DA-EM600 F-ROM Board (8 MB) is required for PCL or PS printing.

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB UE-410047 Additional Memory for Fax / I-FaxExpansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB UE-410048Image Memory (16 MB) DA-SM16B

For Electronic SortingImage Memory (64 MB) DA-SM64BImage Memory (128 MB) DA-SM28BAccounting Software DA-WA10 For Accounting Function2nd Paper Feed Module DA-DS188

Handset KitUE-403171 For USA and Canada

UE-403172 For Other DestinationsAvailable in Specified Destinations

Deluxe Stand DA1D190 For USA and Canada onlyMechanical Counter DZTQ000066 Supplied as a Service Part.

30APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Supplies

UF-9000

Note:1. UG-5530 cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix CF [March

2006] and above for USA/Canada.2. The UG-5540 can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix BF

[February 2006] and below for USA/Canada however, the yield will be the same as for the UG-5530 (6K Max).

.DP-190

DP-180

Note:1. DQ-UG16H / 17H cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix

CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations).2. The DQ-UG26H / 27H can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix

BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations), however, the yield will be the same as the DQ-UG16H / 17H (6K Max).

Part Name Part Number Color of Control Panel Remarks

Toner Cartridge (All in One Cartridge)

UG-5530 Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max

UG-5540* Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K MaxNavy Blue Control Panel 10K (3% coverage), 11.5K Max


TonerDQ-UG17H Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max

DQ-UG27H*Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max

Navy Blue Control Panel 6K (5% coverage), 11.5K MaxDrum Unit DQ-UH35H -


TonerDQ-UG16H Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max

DQ-UG26H*Current Light Blue 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max

Navy Blue Control Panel 6K (5% coverage), 11.5K MaxDrum Unit DQ-UH34H -

New Navy Blue Color Light Blue Color

31APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.6. External View1. Standard Configuration

17.65 in (448 mm)

19.89 in (505 mm)18.19 in (462 mm)

20.5

7 in

(522

mm

)

16.6

5 in

(423

mm

)

17.72 in (450 mm)

Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID

Complies with FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J

(For USA Only)

Front View Right ViewLeft View Rear View

CAUTION!

Top View

Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. "IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS"Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.

32APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2. With Optional 2nd Paper Feed Module Configuration

19.89 in (505 mm)

17.65 in (448 mm)

26.0

9 in

(662

mm

)

18.19 in (462 mm)

5.59

in (1

42 m

m)

17.72 in (450 mm)

33APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3. Space Requirements

18.19 in (462 mm)

19.9

2 in

(506

mm

)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

42.3

6 in

(107

6 m

m)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

26.06 in (662 mm)

14.57 in (370 mm)

18.19 in (462 mm)

19.9

2 in

(506

mm

)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

4.33

in (1

10 m

m)

42.3

6 in

(107

6 m

m)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

30.39 in (772 mm)

14.57 in (370 mm)

Main Unit + Handset Option

Main Unit

34APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.6.1. Serial Number ContentsThe contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:

2 3 4 5 61

Sequential Production Number5-Digit Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 unitsA0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units(Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation(Except Letters “I” and “O”)

For Example:= UF-9000-AU 3QZ = DP-190-PU= DP-180-PB

Production Facility

Production YearStarting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year isrepresented as: A ~ T

A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)B : 02 L : 12C : 03 M : 13D : 04 N : 14E : 05 O : 15F : 06 P : 16G : 07 Q : 17H : 08 R : 18I : 09 S : 19J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)

Production Month

A : January G : JulyB : February H : AugustC : March I : SeptemberD : April J : OctoberE : May K : NovemberF : June L : December

7 8 9 10 11

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3RA3QY

35APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
1.7. Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan

1.8. Sensors and PC Boards

Main Motor

2nd Paper Feed Motor

Clutch

Pick Up Solenoid

Registration Solenoid

Motor Fan

Scanner Motor

ADF Motor

ADF Cover Interlock Switch

Front Cover Safety Interlock Switch

OPC Drum Unit Interlock Switch

Main Switch

FXB PCB

SC PCB

2nd Paper Feed Module I/F PCB

Program Expansion Board

Expansion Flash Memory Card

SDRM PC Board

No Paper Sensor

Engine Control PCB

SPC PCB

Paper Exit/ADUPaper Jam Sensor

PNL1 PCB

ADF PCB

PNL3 PCB

PNL4 PCB

Document Sensor

Read Point Sensor

Home Detect Sensor

PNL5 PCB

PNL2 PCB

No Paper Sensor

Registration Sensor

Toner Sensor

2nd Feeder PCB

Paper Path Sensor

SRU PCB

DC PCB

36APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2 Disassembly Instructions2.1. General Disassembly

Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.

37APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2. Disassembly Instructions2.2.1. Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Unit2.2.1.1. Stamp Head (553)

2.2.1.2. ADF Roller (417), Pick Up Roller (414), Separation Rubber (547)

(1) Open the ADF.(2) Detach the left side of the Scanning Pad (404).(3) Open the Stamp Cover.

(4) Remove the Stamp Head (553).

Note:When closing the Stamp Cover, close gently by pressing both latches.

(1) Open the ADF Cover.(2) Remove the Pick Up Sheet Assembly.

38APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove 2 Snap Rivets (551).(4) Remove the Separator Assembly.

(5) Remove the Separation Rubber (547).Note:

When reinstalling, ensure that the embossed "R" is facing downward.

(6) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).(7) Close the ADF Cover.

(8) Remove the ADF Cover (401).

39APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Tension Spring (426).(10) Remove 1 Screw (V7).(11) Remove the ADF Roller Fix Plate (409).

(12) Lift the ADF Cover Base.(13) Remove the ADF Roller Assembly as

illustrated.

Note:When reinstalling, ensure that the ADF Roller Assembly is connected with 2 Document Stoppers correctly. (ex. When the Pick Up Roller goes down, 2 Document Stoppers rise up.)

(14) Remove the ADF Shaft (418).(15) Remove the ADF Roller (417).

40APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(16) Remove the Stopper Arm (413).(17) Remove 2 E-Ring (447).(18) Remove the Pick Up Shaft (415).(19) Remove the Pick Up Roller (414).

41APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.1.3. ADF PC Board (1911), ADF Motor (541)

(1) Open the ADF Cover.(2) Remove 1 Silver Screw (H8).

(3) Open the ADF.(4) Release 4 Latch Hooks.

(5) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (402).

(6) Disconnect all the Harnesses on ADF PC Board.

(7) Remove 2 Screws (V7) and 1 Screw (V9).(8) Remove the ADF PC Board (1911).

42APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Paper Transport Knob (525).(10) Remove 2 Screws (H8).(11) Remove the Document Guide (429).

(12) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.)(13) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).

(14) Release the Ferrite Core from the Latch Hook.(15) Remove 2 Screws (V9).(16) Remove the ADF Motor (541).

43APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.1.4. Feed Roller (516)

(1) Remove the Document Guide. (Refer to 2.2.1.3.)

(2) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.)(3) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).(4) Remove the front Pin (425).(5) Remove the rear Pin (425).

(6) Remove the Upper ADF Feed Unit.(7) Remove the Wire Clamp.(8) Remove 3 Screws (V9).(9) Remove the Motor Attachment Plate.

(10) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board (PA05).

(11) Remove the ADF Feed Unit.

(12) Remove 5 Gears.

(13) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).(14) Remove the Rear Attachment Plate.

44APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.1.5. Cleaning ADF Roller, Pick Up Roller, Separation Rubber and Feed Roller

(15) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).(16) Remove the Front Attachment Plate.

(17) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).(18) Remove the Frame Cover.

(19) Remove 2 D6 Bushings (537).(20) Remove the Feed Roller (516).

(1) Open the ADF Cover.(2) Clean the ADF Roller (417), Pick Up Roller

(414) and Separation Rubber (547) with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

Note:For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

45APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Clean the Feed Roller (516) with a soft cloth, saturated with water by turning Paper Transport Knob.

Note:For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

46APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.2. Control Panel Unit2.2.2.1. Battery (128), PNL1 PC Board (1905), PNL2 PC Board (1906), PNL3 PC Board

(1907), PNL5 PC Board (1909), PNL4 PC Board (1908), LCD Module (127)

<Replace the Battery>

(1) Remove 1 Screw (V6).(2) Remove the Battery Holder (102).

(3) Replace the Battery (128).Note:

Ensure that the battery is installed with correct polarity.

(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder (102) and the Screw (V6).

<Control Panel>

(5) Remove 2 Screws (V7).(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.

(7) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

47APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(8) Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC Board as illustrated.

(9) Remove 2 Screws (F10).(10) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1905).

(11) Remove the Panel Base (101).

(12) Remove the PNL4 PC Board (1908).

(13) Remove 13 Screws (F10).(14) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (1906).

48APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(15) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on PNL 2 PC Board.



(20) Remove the LCD Holder (122).

49APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(21) Remove the LCD Module (127).

50APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.3. Scanner Unit2.2.3.1. Scanning Lamp (303), SPC PC Board (1910)

(1) Remove the ADF Rear Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.3.)(2) Remove 1 Screw (V9).(3) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board

(PA04).

(4) Open the ADF.(5) Release the Latch of the Left Hinge with a small

Straight Edge Screwdriver and remove the ADF.

(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit. (Refer to 2.2.2.1.)

(7) Remove 8 Screws (V7).(8) Remove the Wire Clamp.(9) Remove the Scanner Cover Assembly (219).

(10) Disconnect the Harness.(11) Remove 2 Screws (W8).(12) Remove the Scanning Lamp (303).(13) Slide the CCD Unit.Note:

The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190 only.

51APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(14) Remove the CCD Harness Seal (213).(15) Remove 2 Screws (H8).(16) Remove the Seal Plate (227).(17) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1922).Note:

There is no need to disconnect the front FG Harness that is attached to the CCD Unit.

Note:The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190 only.

(18) Remove 3 Screws (V7) and 2 Screws (H8).(19) Remove the Main Board Cover (216).

(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses.(21) Remove 4 Screws (H8).(22) Remove SPC PC Board (1910).

52APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.4. Cover Assembly2.2.4.1. Front Cover (601), Rear Door (612)

2.2.4.2. Right Cover (615), Left Cover (616), Rear Cover (617)

(1) Open the Front Cover.(2) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Front

Cover (601).

(3) Open the Rear Door.(4) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Rear

Door (612).

(1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.

(2) Remove 5 Silver Screws (V6).(3) Remove the Right Side Cover.

53APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness (631).(5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.

(6) Remove 5 Silver Screws (V6).(7) Remove the Left Side Cover (616).

(8) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V6).(9) Remove the Rear Cover (617).

54APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.5. PC Board2.2.5.1. SC PC Board (1901), FXB PC Board (1903), CTRL PC Board (1902)

(1) Remove the Right Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)(2) Remove 7 Screws (U1).(3) Remove the SC Cover (701).(4) Remove 2 Screws (U1).(5) Remove the PCB Cover (620).

(6) Remove 1 Screw (U1).(7) Remove the Spring Plate (705).

(8) Unlock the Harness Clamp fastening the USB Cable.

(9) Disconnect the USB Cable (1923) on the SC PC Board (CN305).

(10) Release the USB Cable from the Harness Clamp.

(11) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC Board.

(12) Remove 7 Screws (U1).(13) Remove the SC PC Board (1901).

55APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.5.2. HVPS (1005), LVPS Unit (1021)

(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the FXB PC Board.

(15) Remove 4 Screws (U1).(16) Remove the FXB PC Board (1903).

(17) Release the Harnesses from the Harness Clamp.

(18) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9).(19) Remove the SC Base Bracket (702).

(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the Engine Control PC Board.

(21) Remove 4 Screws (U1).(22) Remove the Engine Control PC Board (1902).

(1) Remove the Left Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)(2) Remove 3 Screws (T9).(3) Remove the HVPS Insulation Sheet (1020).

56APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(4) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U3).(5) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1917).(6) Release the Latch Hook and remove the HVPS

(1005).

(7) Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS.

(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (1219 and 1930) on the LVPS Unit.

(9) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U1).(10) Remove the LVPS Unit.

(11) Remove 5 Screws (U1).(12) Remove 2 Brackets.

57APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.6. Drive Unit

(1) Remove the SC Base Bracket. (Refer to 2.2.5.1.)

(2) Disconnect the Harnesses on the Engine Control PC Board (CN004, CN011, CN012, CN016 and CN019).

(3) Release the Harnesses from the Harness Clamps.

(4) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9).(5) Remove the Solenoid Assembly.

(6) Remove 6 Screws (T9).(7) Disconnect the Harness.(8) Remove the Drive Assembly.

(9) Remove 4 Screws (U1).(10) Disconnect the Harness.(11) Remove the Motor (907).

58APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.7. LSU Unit

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)(2) Remove the Right Cover, Left Cover and Rear

Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)(3) Remove the SC Cover and disconnect the USB

Cable. (Refer to 2.2.5.1.)(4) Release 2 Harnesses from 2 Harness Clamps.(5) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the SC PC Board

(CN304 and CN306).

(6) Remove 6 Screws (Y11).(7) Remove the Scanner Unit.

(8) Remove 3 Screws (V9).(9) Remove the Top Cover (623).

(10) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.(11) Remove 3 Screws (U3).(12) Remove the LSU Unit (1114).

59APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.8. Fuser Unit

CAUTION:To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is hot.

(1) Remove the Rear Door. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)(2) Remove the Scanner Unit and Upper Cover.

(Refer to 2.2.7.)(3) Disconnect 2 Harnesses by pressing down on

the connector latches with a small screw driver.

(4) Remove 4 Screws (T9).(5) Remove the Upper Exit Roller Holder (1101).

(6) Disconnect the Harness (1219) on the LVPS Unit.

(7) Remove the Ferrite Core (1115).

(8) Remove 4 Screws (U4) and 1 Screw (U1).(9) Remove the Fuser Unit.

60APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(10) Remove 2 Screws (T9).(11) Remove the Side Fuser Cover (1226).(12) Remove 2 Screws (T9).(13) Remove the Left Fuser Cover (1224).

(14) Remove 2 Black Screws (U5).(15) Separate the Upper Fuser Unit.

(16) Remove the Pressure Roller (1205).

(17) Remove 2 Screws (V1).Caution:

Exercise caution not to bend the Fuser Lamp Terminal.

(18) Remove the Halogen Lamp (1209).Note:

Do not Touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp with bare hands. Grease from finger prints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean finger prints.

61APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(19) Shift the Fuser Roller and remove the Left Heat Roller Bushing (1206).

(20) Remove the Heat Roller (1205).(21) Remove the Heat Roller Gear (1208) and the

Right Heat Roller Bushing (1207).

(22) Remove 3 Screws (U3).(23) Remove 2 Thermostats (1204).

(24) Remove 1 Screw (U4).(25) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1229).

(26) Remove 4 Springs (1223).(27) Remove 4 Screws (T9).(28) Remove 4 Separator Plates (1222).(29) Remove 4 Separators (1225).

62APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.9. Paper Feed Module2.2.9.1. Pick Up Roller (1316) and Separator Pad (1615)

2.2.9.2. Registration Roller (1303) and Paper Feed Roller (1305)

(1) Pull the Paper Tray out.

(2) Remove the Separator Pad (1625).

(3) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)(4) Remove the Pick Up Roller Assembly.

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)(2) Remove the Toner Cartridge.(3) Remove the Solenoid Assembly. (Refer to

2.2.6.)(4) Remove the Registration Gear (1304) and

Drive Wheel (1308).(5) Remove 2 Bushings (1309).(6) Remove the Registration Roller (1303) and

Paper Feed Roller (1305).

63APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.10. Bias Transfer Roller (1503)

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)(2) Remove the Cartridge Unit.(3) Remove 2 Transfer Roller Holder (1501).

(4) Remove the Bias Transfer Roller Assembly.

(5) Remove the Spacer (811).(6) Remove the Transfer Gear (1505).(7) Remove 2 Bushings (1504).(8) Remove 2 Spacer (811).

64APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.11. ADU

(1) Remove the Scanner Unit. (Refer to 2.2.7.)(2) Slide the Paper Tray out.(3) Turn the Unit upside down.(4) Remove 4 Screws (T9).(5) Remove the Lower Base Plate (1401).

(6) Remove 2 Screws (U1).(7) Remove the Plate.(8) Remove 4 Screws (T9).(9) Remove the ADU Unit.

(10) Remove the E-Ring (U6).(11) Remove the A/D Unit Join Gear (1411).(12) Remove the ADU Registration Roller shaft

(1409).

(13) Disconnect the Harness on the Registration / Paper Path Sensor PC Board.

(14) Remove 1 Screw (T9).(15) Release the Latch Hook and remove the

Registration / Paper Detect Sensor PC Board(1938).

65APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.12. 2nd Paper Feed Module2.2.12.1. Pick Up Roller (1733), Separator Pad (1812), 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945)

(1) Separate the 2nd Paper Feed Module from the Unit.

(2) Remove 2 Screws (U1).(3) Remove the Top Cover Assembly (1730).

(4) Remove 4 Screws (U1).(5) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Right

Cover.

(6) Remove the Spacer (811).(7) Remove the Clutch (1734).

(8) Remove 2 Screws (U1).(9) Remove the 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945).

66APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(10) Remove the Spacer (811).(11) Remove the Bearing (1715).(12) Shift the Shaft and remove the Pick Up Roller

(1733).

(13) Remove the Paper Tray.(14) Remove the Separator Pad (1824).

67APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.13. Toner Cartridge2.2.13.1. Cleaning Paper Feed Roller (1305), Registration Roller (1303), Paper Chute and

Dust Scraper Assembly (1315)

(1) Open the Front Cover.

(2) Remove the Toner Cartridge.

(3) Wipe the Paper Feed Roller (A: 1305), Registration Roller (B: 1303) and Paper Chute (C) with a soft cloth that has been moistened with water.

Note:1. Ensure to clean up all the paper dust.2. Paper Feed Roller (A) can be rotated half way,

Registration Roller (B) can be rotated in the direction of the arrow. Exercise care not to damage the Sheets (D) in front of the Registration Roller (B).

(4) Open the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover (1315).

(5) Clean the inside with the vacuum cleaner.(6) Close the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover.

Note:Ensure that the cover is firmly closed as it may damage the OPC Drum.

68APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.3. Hardware Identification Template

Part No. Figure RemarkRef. No.

Screw (See Note)XYN3+F5

ScrewXYN3+F5FJ3F

ScrewXTB3+8GF10

ScrewXTW3+8LP3

ScrewXTW26+8ST8

T9

U1

ScrewXYC3+FF8CU3

ScrewXTW3+12SU4

ScrewXTW3+12SFZU5

ScrewPJNEB0003YU7

ScrewXTB3+8J19

ScrewXTW3+8PP8

ScrewXTW3+8LFNH8

ScrewXTB3+4FL9

E-Ring21070121706447

G8

E-RingXUC4VW-VU6

ScrewXTW3+U8SU8

Washer, Star (See Note)XWC3B

Washer, StarXWC3BFJ

Screw (See Note)XTW3+8S

ScrewXTW3+8SFJ

Screw (See Note)XTW3+6L

ScrewXTW3+6LFJ

69APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
WasherXWE4V3

ScrewXTW3+8PFNV7

ScrewXTW4+16PFNV8

ScrewXTW3+6LFNV9

ScrewXTS3+8JW1

ScrewDZZSP29011W2

ScrewXTB2+12JW4

ScrewXSN2+10FNW5

ScrewXTW4+8LFNY11

ScrewXTW3+6LFCV5

ScrewXTB3+8JFNV6

ScrewPJNAC0003ZW7

ScrewXTN3+8JFNW8

ScrewXTW3+6SV2

ScrewXSN3+4U9

V1Screw (See Note)XYC3+FF6

ScrewXYC3+FF6FJ

Part No. Figure RemarkRef. No.

70APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points3.1. Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machinecleaning and parts replacement.It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervalsfor customer satisfaction.The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.

- You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.- After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts and

packaging in accordance with local regulations and clean the surrounding area.

- Before servicing the equipment, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves

and eye protection.

1 Timing- Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive

Maintenance Check List (refer to 3.4) in the service manual.

2 Cleaning the Rollers- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.- Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.

3 Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions

Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFFposition, and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

CAUTION!

- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful and avoid clothing

from being caught by moving components.-

- Ensure to use correct screws.- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical

continuity.- To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.

While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect theconnectors on any PC Board.

71APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4 Laser Handling Precautions The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed bya protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will notstray or leak during photocopying operation. However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective

properties into the laser's path..2. Before servicing the machine, remove watches, rings, or other metallicobjects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laserstriking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximumsafety, please follow the above precautions.

72APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.2. Required Tools

3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method

No. Tools No. Tools1 Soft Cloth 7 Pliers2 Isopropyl Alcohol 8 Cotton Swab3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 9 Brush

4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 10KS-660 - Conductive Grease(Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc. URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)

5 Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 11Molykote EM-50L Grease (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)

6 Tweezer

No. Part Description Important Action Comments

1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution.2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM

DATA with the previously printed one.2 Auto Document

Feeder (ADF)Check & Clean

1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Wet soft cloth (Water).Note:

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

3 Scanner Unit Check & Clean

1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.

4 Transmitter Unit Check & Clean

1. Remove any foreign obstacles.2. Clean the Rollers with Wet soft cloth (Water).

5 Mirrors Check & Clean

1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your bare hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol.

6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.2. Check the Connectors.3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.

7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & Grease

1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.

8 Timing Belts Check & Clean

1. Check for belt looseness or abrasion.2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.

73APR 2006Ver. 3.0

http://www.shinetsusilicones.com

http://www.dowcorning.com

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points

74APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check ListThe chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The list is for an average usage of 50 transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and actual use will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only.

Note:1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module. To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic Counter - 00 (List Print).

3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size, orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions.

• Total Counter View Mode on the LCDThe Total Counter can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "COPY SIZE" and "PAPER TRAY" keys simultaneously in Standby mode for quick reference.

• LCD Contrast AdjustmentPress holding the “CLEAR” key and press “ORIGINAL SIZE” key for Lighter or “COPY SIZE” key for Darker.

No.Preventive

Maintenance Parts

Ref. No.

Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment Ref. CounterCycle

(Sheet) Method Cycle (Sheet) Procedure

ADF Unit1 Separation Rubber 547 10K Wet soft cloth 50K

Refer to 2.2.1. F7-082 Pick Up Roller 414 10K Wet soft cloth 100K

3 ADF Roller 417 10K Wet soft cloth 100K4 Feed Roller 516 10K Wet soft cloth 100K

Paper Feed Module5 Pick Up Roller 1316 10K Wet soft cloth 85K Refer to

2.2.9.F7-126 Separator Pad 1625 10K Wet soft cloth 85K

7 Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) 1503 10K Dry soft cloth 85K Refer to

2.2.10.2nd Paper Feed Module

8 Pick Up Roller 1733 10K Wet soft cloth 85K Refer to 2.2.12. F7-13

9 Separator Pad 1824 10K Wet soft cloth 85KFuser Unit

10 Fuser Unit 1117 - - 85K Refer to 2.2.8. F7-02

TOTAL COUNTER

1234

75APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5. Updating the FirmwareThe Quickest and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL or PS/PCL options.Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

3.5.1. Firmware ConfigurationA. Hardware Configuration

This machine is controlled by two (2) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board and the Scanner Control (Scanner).

B. SC PC Board FirmwareThe 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. An Optional Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1.The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard and the 8 MB of SLOT 1 depends upon the configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.

(1) StandardThe Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (A).

(2) For PCL OptionThe PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card.When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4 MB card for the PCL Control Program (3) and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4).

(3) For PS OptionThe PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E). When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).

SC PC Board StandardConfiguration

With PCL OptionConfiguration

With PS OptionConfiguration

On Board (A)

4 MB

(B)

4 MB

(D)

4 MB

PC (1) (2) (5)

CPU 4 MBProgram Program Program

Ethernet Port

F-ROM

PC

USB Port Slot 1 (CN327) (C) 8MB (E) 8MB(3) (6)

Program Program

8 MB

2 MB (a) 4 MB (a)FRM8 PCB

(4) (7)Flash Memory Card

Font

4 MB or 8 MB4 MB (b)

4 MB(b)

Panel Control Program (Display & Key In)Bitmap DataFont Data

SPC PC Board

CPU 2 MB

Scanner Control ProgramF-ROM

Font

76APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
C. SPC PC Board FirmwareThe 2 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from the SC PCB.

D. Firmware Updating PortsThree (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.

(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

(2) USB Port (Alternate)The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.

(3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate)The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or 8 MB Flash Memory Card. To update the SC, SPC and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard configuration or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL or PS/PCL configuration.

3.5.2. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio".Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat[Navy Blue Control Panel]Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe

[Light Blue Control Panel]Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exeTo:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

77APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeMake sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable.Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).

Note:1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing

the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions.

2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update.

3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.

4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name, or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder User Authentication

Transferring Order

\ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx(Navy Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx(Light Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

\ DP-190_180_xxR_xxxxxx(Navy Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

\ DP-190_180_xx_xxxxxx(Light Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

78APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.3. Updating through USB Port (Alternate Method)If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2. Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat[Navy Blue Control Panel]Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe


3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeImportant: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.

79APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable.Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).

Note:1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to

normal upon completion of the firmware update.2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination

location.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File Transferring Order


\ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.binDX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx(Light Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.binDX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2\ DP-190_180_xxR_xxxxxx(Navy Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.binDP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2\ DP-190_180_xx_xxxxxx(Light Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.binDP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

80APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate Method)1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning

Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.5. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).7. The firmware is copied into the machine.8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.

10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.11. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are

other than factory default.Note:

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9 Parameters F9-02-xx.

Caution:If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)

3.5.5. Creating a Master Firmware CardA. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat[Navy Blue Control Panel]Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe


81APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Card Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.

1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC. (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.

B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys

simultaneously to return to standby.8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.

10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

3.5.6. Erasing the Master Firmware Card1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET

TO START”. Press “STOP”.7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.

10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

82APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.7. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)(Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then you cannot add this feature.Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).

3.5.7.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1” key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “3” key twice, if “33 USER AUTH 1:COPY” displays on the LCD, this signifies that User

Authentication is available on the machine.7. Press the “RESET” key, to exit the General Settings mode.8. If “33 USER AUTH 1:COPY” is not displayed on the LCD, then you cannot add this feature.

3.5.7.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1“ key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “0” key, and then press “SET” key.7. Press the “SET” key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST.8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ”******* DP-190 v4 *******”.9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example “******* DP-190 *******”), then you cannot add this

feature.

83APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.8. Notice after installing the HDD optionAfter the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive

Unit and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position.5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the

Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down

procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power Off.

7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

3.5.9. Firmware Emergency RecoveryThe easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master Firmware Flash Card method (1 Flash Card required).

Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type first as it only requires 1 file (SC) to bring the machine to initial working condition. Note:

It is not possible to recover the SPC using this method.

After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.

If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:1. Turn the power Off.

Before proceeding to the next step, you must create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first 3.5.5).

2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button.

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from Master Firmware Card.Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

84APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.10. Firmware Version

SC :

SPC :

DP-TRI A A Vxxxxx AU

Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK

Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese

Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E : Optional

Model Number

etc.

(a)DX-TRI A A Vxxxxx (a) AU

b : English, French & Spanishg : German, French & Italian

Division Soft (When it is divided into (a) and (b))

DX-TRI S A A Vxxxxx

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

AA: Fixed

SPC

Model Number

85APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.6. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to SideWhen installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment may be required.The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, especially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.

3.6.1. Printer Registration 1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper

size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.

3.6.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper

size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.Note:

Do not pull out the 1st tray to disable it when adjusting the 2nd tray. The 1st tray is required as it acts as a paper path for the paper in the 2nd tray.

2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-12, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray.8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.

<Figure>Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).For Letter or A4, place as Portrait.

5 mmTop (Lead edge)

Two lines are printed

5 mm 5 mm

Two lines are printed

86APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.6.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper

size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.3. Perform the Service Mode F1-06 (Print Test Pattern 4).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.

3.6.4. Original Registration & CCD Read Adjustments1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper

size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.3. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the Original Registration.7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value.8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (CCD Read Position), to adjust the CCD Read for the side

position.9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.

10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.

3.6.5. ADF Original Read Edge & ADF Main Scan Adjustments1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper

size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.3. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust the ADF Original Read Edge.7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Image Read Start), to adjust the ADF Main Scan for Side

position.9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.

10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.

87APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4 Troubleshooting4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart

START

Plug the Power Cord, and turn the Power Switches ON.

Does the LCD display function correctly?

Does the original document feed through correctly?

Does the recording paperexit the unit?

Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems (Sect. 4.4).

Troubleshoot the Document Feeder(Sect. 4.5).

Check for recording paper path problems.

Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display (Sect. 4.2).

Troubleshoot any 3-digitINFO. CODE displayed.

Does the unit produce normal copies?

Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, network connection, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes).

Does the unit power up normally?

Yes

Yes

YesYes

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

88APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.2. Improper LCD Display

Note:LCD Display Brightness AdjustmentTo adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.

ORIGINAL SIZE : DimmerCOPY SIZE : Brighter

Replace the SC PCB.

Is the trouble resolved?

Replace the LowVoltage PowerSupply Unit.

Is the trouble resolved?

Check connectors on the SC PCBand PNL PCB.

Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?

Replace the LCD Module. Replace the

Touch Panel.

Does CNP306, pin 6 on the SCPCB measure +5 VDC?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

NoNo

START

END

END

89APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems4.3.1. Black Copy

START

No

Yes

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the Power Supply Unit normal?

Is the SC PCB normal?

Is the Toner Cartridgeoperational?

Replace the Toner Cartridge.

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the contacts between PSU and Toner Cartridge.3. Replace the PSU.

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.

END

Pap

er T

rave

l

Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?

90APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.2. Blank Copy

START

END


Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR?


Is the Power Supply Unit normal?

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Replace the Toner Cartridge .Yes

No

1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth.2. Replace the BTR.

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit.2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit.3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path?

Yes

NoIs the SC PCB normal?

1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains.2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB.

2. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

No

Pap

er T

rave

l


91APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.3. Vertical White Lines

START

END

Replace the recording paper.

Yes

No

Replace the Toner Cartridge .

Are there any foreign particlesor stains blocking the Laser Beam path?

No


Yes

No

Clean or replace the rollers.

No

Yes


No

Yes

Yes

Is the recording paper damp?

Is the Toner Cartridge operational?

1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains.2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).


No

Yes

Are the Fuser and PressureRoller surfaces clean?

Pap

er T

rave

l

PIs the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?

92APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.4. Ghost Images

START

END

No

Yes



No

Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean?

No

Yes

Is the recording paper damp?


No

Yes

Yes

No





Pap

er T

rave

lA

AA A A


93APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.5. Vertical Dark Lines

START

No

Yes



No

YesAre there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR?

Yes

No

2. Replace the Toner Cartridge.


Is the Laser Unit (LSU)normal?

No

Yes Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).

END

No

YesClean or replace the rollers.

Pap

er T

rave

l

P



1. Clean the Corona Wire as illustrated below.

Corona Wire

Carefully wipe the Corona Wire in the Toner Cartridge by sliding a dry Cotton Swab from end to end a few times.

94APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.6. Horizontal Dark Lines

START


Yes

No



No

Yes



No

Yes

Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?No


Is the Power Supply Unit

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit .2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit.3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Yes

No

END

No

Yes Clean or replace the rollers.

Pap

er T

rave

l

P



normal?

95APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.7. Dark Background

Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?No


START

No

Yes



No

YesIs the recording paper damp?

Yes

No



Is the Power Supply Unit(HVPS) normal?

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).

2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).

Yes

No

END

No


Pape

r Tra

velP



96APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.8. Light Print

No

Yes

START

No

YesIs the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?



No


Yes

No

Replace the paper.


Are there any foreign particles orstains blocking the Laser Unitpath?

Yes

No1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains.2. Replace the LSU.

Is the Power Supply Unit (HVPS) normal?

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS) .

Yes

No


Pape

r Tra

vel

Are the Fuser and Pressure Rollersurfaces clean?

97APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.9. Horizontal White Lines

END

No


START

No

Yes



No


Yes

No



Is the Power Supply Unit (HVPS) normal?

1. Check all connectors andvoltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).

2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).

Yes

No


Are there any foreign particlesor stains on the BTR?

No

Yes

Pape

r Tra

velP



98APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

Note:Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly becomes an open-circuit.

END

Is the Fuser Unit normal?No

Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

START

No



P

99APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.11. Voids in Solid Areas

END

No


START

No




Yes

No


P

Pap

er T

rave

l


100APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.12. Black Dots

END

No


START


Yes

No


P

Pap

er T

rave

l


101APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases

START

No



END

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit?

1. Remove any foreign particles or clean the stains.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path?

Yes

No Remove any obstructions and clean the paper path.

No

YesIs the recording paper skewing?

Ensure the paper is set under the Paper Separation Clips in the Cassette.

No

Yes

2. Replace the Fuser Unit.

Pap

er T

rave

l

102APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy QualitySTART

Is the Test Pattern printout in Service Mode 3 normal?

1. Replace the SC PCB.2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.4. Replace the Toner Cartridge .

END

Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit.

Is the printed copy correct?

Yes

No

Make a local copy.

No

Yes Check the Transmission Block.(CCD PCB and SC PCB)

Is the received copy correct?

1. Check the SC PCB.2. Check the FXB PCB.3. Check the Telephone Line Cable.4. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

No

Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter?

Yes

No

Telephone line quality is poor.(Refer to 4.6.)

The transmitting machine may be defective.

103APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.15. Abnormal Printing

START

Is the recording paper loaded in the Cassette properly?

1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper Separation Clips.

Is a Panasonic Toner Cartridge being used?

Yes

No

Is the recording paper size andthickness within specification?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Replace with correct paper.

Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge.

Are all switches and sensorsoperating properly?

Do the rollers rotate properly?

Yes

No

Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit?

Yes

No

Remove the foreign particles or paper piecesfrom the receiver unit.

1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches andsprings.

2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Adjust, clean or replace.

Yes

No

Is the receiving mechanismoperating correctly?

Yes

No

Adjust or replace any defective parts.

END

104APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.16. Scanned Copy Quality Problems

START

No

YesIs the LED Array abnormal?

Replace the LED Array.

END

Are the Transmitting Rollersdirty?

Are there any foreign particles orpaper pieces in the scanning area?

Yes

No Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area.

No

YesIs the scanning area dirty?

Clean the Scanning Glass.Clean the Mirrors.

No

Yes

Clean the rollers.

Is the Scanner Assembly abnormal?Yes

No2. Check CCD PCB.3. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.).4. Replace the CIS Assembly (Sect. 2.).

1. Check SC PCB.

105APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.4. Document Feeder (ADF)4.4.1. No Document Feed

START

END

NoIs the ADF Unit closed?

Close the ADF Unit firmly.Yes

NoIs the ADF Roller clean?

Clean the surface of the rollerwith water (Sect. 2.).

Yes

No

Is the ADF Roller worn out?

Replace the ADF Roller(Sect. 2.).

Yes

NoDoes the ADF Roller drive properly?

Does the ADF Roller's gearsystem function properly?

Yes

NoSeparation Rubber normal?Is the adjustment of the

Is the Separation Rubber wornout?

Replace the Separation Rubber.

No

Clean or adjust the SeparationRubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).

No

Yes Adjust the gear system or replacedefective parts.

Yes

Yes

106APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.4.2. Document Does Not Feed or Multiple FeedsSTART

END

NoIs the ADF Unit closed?

Close the ADF Unit firmly.Yes

NoIs the ADF Roller clean?

Clean the surface of the rollerwith water (Sect. 2.).

Yes

No

Is the ADF Roller worn out?

Replace the ADF Roller(Sect. 2.).

Yes

NoDoes the ADF Roller drive properly?

Does the ADF Roller's gearsystem function properly?

Yes

NoSeparation Rubber normal?Is the adjustment of the

Is the Separation Rubber wornout?

Replace the Separation Rubber.

No

Clean or adjust the SeparationRubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).

No

Yes Adjust the gear system or replacedefective parts.

Yes

Yes

107APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.4.3. Document Jam (030) or Skew

END

START

Close the ADF Unit firmly.

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Is the ADF Unit closed?Copy Mode

Sample

Clean or replace Sensor PCB.

Do all sensors operate normally?

Clean the surface of roller with water.

Does the Feed Roller have drive and sufficient friction?

Remove the foreign particles or papers from the document path.

Is the document path clearof foreign particles or paper?

Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Is the Transmitting mechanism operating properly?

108APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5. CommunicationsThis section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems.It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings.

4.5.1. Communication Trouble

START

No

YesIs this an international

#021 : Off On#025 : 1st 2nd

#018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps#024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz#030 : 75 ms#033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps/

TC9600/TC7200

1 sec

communication?

Transmitting Side Receiving Side

#010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm

To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio).

#017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps#011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm#018 : 14400 bps#019 : On Off

12000 to 2400 bps


Receiving Side

To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unitand the phone company exchange.

#025 : 1st 2nd 1080 Hz#030 : 75 ms 1 sec

To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo.

#070 : 128 256 to 2048

To cope with impulse noise.Receiving Side

Perform a communication test after changing settings.


Transmitting Side#014 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm #013 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm

#033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps#023 : Normal Long#033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps

#024 : 2100 Hz

109APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5.2. Poor Transmitted Copy QualitySTART

Yes

Make a copy.

No

No

Yes

Is the printed copy normal?

Perform a transmission testto a reference fax unit.

Is the LED Array lit?

the SC PCB?

Yes

Yes

No

Are CN (SC PCB) and CN (CCD PCB)connected properly? Connect them correctly.

Replace the LVPS.

Does nLEDON go Low when the scan starts?

Check CN on the SCPCB and the LED harness.

Does the problem stilloccur?

Replace the LED Array.

The receiving unit may bedefective.

1. Replace the Scanner Block.2. Replace the SC PCB.

Replace the SC PCB.

Is the transmitted copynormal?

No

Yes

No

No

1. Check CN (SC PCB) and CN (FXB PCB).2. Check the telephone line cable. Replace if necessary.

Does poor transmitted copyappear when transmitting toa specific receiver?

Telephone line quality ispoor.

END

Yes

Yes

Yes

Does +24 VDC alive on

110APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5.3. Dialing ProblemsSTART

END

No

YesDoes the unit proceed toPhase B?

1. Set documents on the ADF correctly.

4. Refer to Sect. 4.3. The called party is busy.2. Check the telephone line connection.

Are you using One-Touch or ABBR dialing?

Are you using direct dialing?

No

Yes

Check the registered telephone number.

Is the Monitor Volume too loud or too low?

No

Yes

Check the dialed telephone number.

No

Yes

Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the "/\" or "\/" curser keys.

111APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5.4. Transmission ProblemsSTART

END

Yes

NoDoes the ID display?

1. No ID function at the remote unit.2. The ID is not set for the remote unit.

Does the Verification Stamp operate?

Is the copy quality OK?

Yes

No

No

1. Set "STAMP=ON"2. Check the SC PCB.3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid.4. Replace the SC PCB.

Any other problems?

Yes

No

Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.

Yes

See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes).

112APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5.5. Reception ProblemsSTART

END

Yes

NoDoes the machine answer the Ringing signal?

1. Set "RCV = AUTO"2. Check that all covers are closed firmly.3. Check the telephone line connection.4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting.5. Check the recording paper path.6. Check the SC PCB and FXB PCB.7. Replace the FXB PCB.8. Replace the SC PCB.

Is the received copy OK?

Any other problems?

Yes

No

Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.14.

Yes

No See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes).

113APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.5.6. Polling Problems

Note:No-check Mode means that password is not set.

START

END

Yes

NoIs Polling reception OK?

1. Set the same polling password as the other party is using.2. Check the password of the remote unit.

Is Polling transmission OK?

Any other problems?

Yes

No

1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.*2. Check the password of the remote unit.

Yes

No See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting using information codes).

114APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.6. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface4.6.1. Checking Network Configuration

START

From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all

Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit

Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unitInternet Parameters ?

Print the current Internet Parameters List

Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping IP" command ?

From the DOS Prompt, enter the followingcommand-line utility: "route print"

Does the current routing table for theGateway match ?

Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway.

Ask the Network Administrator toverify the proper information.

Check the power switch, cables and the current settings of unit.

Does the Default Gateway respond to the "ping IP" command ?

Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status.

Does the unit respond to the"ping host name" command ?

Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status.

Ask the Network Administrator to verify the POP/SMTP account and system status.

Does the unit respond to the"telnet" command ?

Replace the SC PCB

Ask the customer for the Preinstallation Information form filled out by the Network Administrator. Verify this information with the InternetParameters List that you just printed. Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit?

Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask:

115APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.6.2. Testing the TCP/IP NetworkIt is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.

When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.

In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).

In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.

1. System Diagram ModelAsk the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required.

PC Client[192.168.3.4]

ec4.labo.mgcs.com

Router (R1)

DNS Server

SMTP/POP Server

Panasonic Device[192.168.3.5]

ef1.labo.mgcs.com

sv2.labo.mgcs.com[192.168.1.2]

sv1.labo.mgcs.com[192.168.1.1]

[192.168.1.253]

[192.168.3.254]

Network ConfigurationDomain Name: labo.mgcs.com

"ping"PC Client

[192.168.1.4]ec5.labo.mgcs.com

WAN

PC Client[192.168.4.1]

fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com

Hub

PC Client[210.232.71.18]

js2.labo.mgcs.com

Network B[192.168.1.0]

Network C[192.168.4.0]

Network A[192.168.3.0]

Network D

116APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2. Checking the Current ConfigurationPrint the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT.

Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit:

Default Gateway IP Address:DNS Server IP Address:Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)

For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NTThe following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com (obtained from the Host Name).

3. Using "PING" to Test Physical ConnectivityThe Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned).

Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.

-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not

responding.

Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1 Node Type : Hybrid NetBIOS Scope ID : IP Routing Enabled. : No WINS Proxy Enabled : No NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No

Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 : Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter

Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 DHCP Enabled : No IP Address : 192.168.3.4 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254 Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18

C:\>ipconfig /all

Windows NT IP Configuration

117APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
PINGing the Unit

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed:

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com

Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254

Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:


C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com

Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:


C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com

Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:

Request timed out.Request timed out.Request timed out.Request timed out.

Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

118APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.e.g.

4. Tracing a Packet RouteAnother useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination.

The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.

This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you

know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.

b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded.

To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>

Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send. -w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not

responding.

C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000

Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.comTracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]over a maximum of 30 hops:

1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254 2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

119APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5. Managing Network Route TablesIn the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments.

The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.

IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1.

The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop.

When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.

Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below:

• MASKIf this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.

• NetmaskIf included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255.

• GatewaySpecifies the gateway.

• METRICSpecifies the metric / cost for the destination.

All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253

120APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:

6. Host Name Query on DNS ServerWindows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:

NS(Name Server) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

MX(Mail Exchange) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

A (Address) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

C:\WINDOWS>route printActive Routes:

Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1 192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1

C:\>nslookupDefault Server: sv1.labo.pcc.comAddress: 192.168.1.1

> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.[sv1.labo.pcc.com.] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com[sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com

> ls -t A labo.pcc.com[sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com sv1 sv2 ec5 ec4 ef1

A 192.168.1.1

A 192.168.1.4A 192.168.3.4A 192.168.3.5

A 192.168.1.2

121APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET CommandTELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.

For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button.Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.For example,

C:\WINDOWS>telnet

telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]

220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx

helo250 Hello

mail from:test250 Sender OK

rcpt to:[email protected] Receipient OK

data354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"

[Press the Enter Key]Panasonic Internet Faxtesttest[Press the Enter Key][Press the Enter Key][Press the Enter Key]250 OK, Mail accept

quit221 Closing transaction channel

122APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7. Error Codes (For Copier)The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier. When trouble occurs, the copier stops.

Note:Some Codes are not used in the UF-9000/DP-180/190, and are reserved for future use.

4.7.1. User Error Codes (U Code)

Note:Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.

User Error Codes (U Code) TableCode Item Check PointsU01 CLOSE FRONT COVER 1. Front Cover is open.

2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Front Cover Sensor is defective.4. LVPS connector is disconnected.5. LVPS is defective.6. Engine PCB is defective.

U13 TONER IS RUNNING LOWor OUT OF TONER

1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.2. Low Toner.3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.4. Toner Sensor is defective.5. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 6. Engine PCB is defective.

U16 NO CARTRIDGE 1. No Toner Cartridge.U20 CLOSE ADF COVER 1. ADF Cover is open.

2. ADF is not installed correctly.3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected. 4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.5. LVPS connector is disconnected.6. LVPS is defective.

U21 CLOSE PLATEN COVER While the copier is initializing, the ADF Cover was opened.

U52 SCANNER SELF-CHECK 1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected.2. SC/SPC PCB is defective.

U90 REPLACE BATTERY Backup Battery is wearing out.

U21

U20

U90

U13 / U16

U01U52

123APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7.1.1. Low Toner Messages / OperationThe Toner Cartridge Yield is approximately 5,000 pages using Letter or A4 size paper and 5% Black coverage, however, the maximum yield will not exceed 6,000 pages.The machine controls the printer to maintain good print quality by controlling the Bias Voltage with the Low Toner Sensor and the Print Counter.

There are three Toner warning LCD Displays:LCD 1: [TONER IS RUNNING LOW: U13]

Low Toner sensor detects Low Toner or the machine has printed 5,500 pages.Preparing a new cartridge for replacement is recommended.

LCD 2: [WARNING TONER LOW LESS THAN 50 PAGES]450 pages have been printed since the LCD 1 appeared.Replacement with the new cartridge is recommended.

LCD 3: [OUT OF TONER: U13]50 pages have been printed after LCD 2 appeared or 6,000 pages have been printed.Replace with the new cartridge.

When replacing with a New Cartridge, perform the steps below to reset the Print Counter.1. Press "FUNCTION" key.2. Press "1" or the "Arrow" key to enter "GENERAL SETTINGS".3. Press "SET" key.4. Press "4" to enter "04 TONER REPLACEMENT PRESS SET TO SELECT".5. Press "SET" key, then "TONER REPLACEMENT? 1:Yes 2:No".6. Press "1" key to reset the Print Counter.7. Press "STOP" key to return to the Standby mode.

124APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)

Section Jam LocationA ADFB Paper Transport / Exit AreaC Paper Entry Area

Jam Error Codes (J Codes) TableCode Contents SectionJ00 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after paper

started feeding. (Sheet Bypass)

CJ01 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)

J02 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)

J43 Paper Jam in the Registration Sensor or Paper Path Sensor.B, C

J44 Paper Jam in the Paper Exit / ADU Paper Jam Sensor.J70 Read Point Sensor does not go ON within 10 seconds after the original starts feeding.

(Information Code 030 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)A

J71 Original was longer than 78.7 in (2m).(Information Code 031 or 032 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)

J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.

CJ82 The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU Middle Sensor is activated.

J83 The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed.

J92 The Original was pulled out when feeding an original.A

J93 The Original remained in the ADF.

A

B

C

125APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
• Sensor and Switch Location

126APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7.2.1. Copy / Print Over Flow / FlowService Mode F5-10: Exit Tray Limitation (Paper Stack Limitation)

0: None1: 150 Sheets/Accumulate2: 150 Sheets/Job

Copy or Print

Yes

No

Select 1 or 2

FAX/EMAIL

Is the job larger than 150 pages? Normal Function

If next Job is performed at this point in time

Stop printing when 150 pages print out

Warning Display Cancel Job?

Job ClearPrint the Remaining Job Pages

Copy or Print

Is Sort Memory Space Available?

Wait for Previous Job to Complete

After Pending Job is Completed, Printing Will Start Start Print Count from 0

Add the Previous Page of a Job as Accumulative Print Count

Cancel "Pi Pi Pi" Sound

*1 : Same Function as when the next print job is received in Queue during Paper Jam

*1

1

Time Out -> Error Display on Print Queue Screen

START

STOP

Print

Copy

Yes

No

F5-10: [2]

F5-10: [1]

Yes

No

EXIT TRAY FULL:EMPTY & PRESS START

COPY, PRINT mode

FAX/EMAIL, SCAN modeEXIT TRAY FULL:PRESS COPY

1

127APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

E1: Optical Unit ErrorCode Function Check Points

E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass Scanning

1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.2. Home Position Sensor is defective.3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.4. Scanner Motor is defective.5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.7. SPC PCB is defective.8. LVPS is defective.

E1- 22 Polygon Motor Synchronization 1. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 2. Engine PCB is defective.3. Laser Unit is defective.4. LVPS connectors is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective.6. SC PCB is defective.

E1- 31 Scanning Lamp (does not turn On)

1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected.2. Scanning Lamp is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.4. SPC PCB is defective.5. SC PCB is defective.

E2: Lift DC Motor ErrorCode Function Check Points

E2 Not Applicable -

E3: Development System ErrorCode Function Check Points

E3- 20 Main Motor Rotation 1. Drive Mechanism is defective.2. Main Motor connector is disconnected.3. Main Motor is defective.4. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 5. Engine PCB is defective.6. LVPS is defective.

E4: Fuser Unit ErrorCode Function Check PointsE4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty.

2. Thermistor position is incorrect. 3. Fuser temperature is low.4. Thermistor is defective. 5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected. 6. Fuser Thermostat is defective.7. Fuser Lamp is defective. 8. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 9. Engine PCB is defective.

128APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed.

E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor Rotation (Fuser Unit Side)

1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected.2. Exhaust Fan is defective. 3. LVPS connector is disconnected.4. LVPS is defective.5. Engine PCB is defective.

E5: System ErrorCode Function Check PointsE5- 05 SPC Firmware Failure 1. SPC PCB is defective.E5- 11 Thermistor, Toner Sensor 1. SC/Engine PCB connector is disconnected.

2. SC/Engine PCB is defective.E5- 12 Main CPU/SPC Interface Error 1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected.

2. SC/SPC PCB is defective.

E7: Optional Unit ErrorCode Function Check PointsE7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.

2. Hardware Key is defective.

E13: Low Toner or Out of TonerCode Function Check PointsE13 TONER IS RUNNING LOW

or OUT OF TONER

1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.2. Out of Toner.3. Low Toner Sensor is disconnected.4. Low Toner Sensor is defective.5. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 6. Engine PCB is defective.

E4: Fuser Unit ErrorCode Function Check Points

129APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.8. Information Code Table (For Facsimile)

Fax Information CodesCode Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause001 RCV

COPYC, D Leading edge of the recording

paper fails to reach the Timing Sensor. (1st Tray)

Recording paper jam.Timing Sensor abnormal.

002 RCVCOPY

C, D Leading edge of the recording paper fails to reach the Timing Sensor. (2nd Tray)

Recording paper jam.Timing Sensor abnormal.

007 RCVCOPY

C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording paper fails to reach the Paper Exit Sensor.

2. Recording paper has not completely passed the Paper Exit Sensor.

Recording paper jam.Paper Exit Sensor abnormal.

008 Paper Tray is opened while paper is feeding.

Paper Tray is opened.

010 RCVCOPY

B, C No recording paper. No recording paper or paper is not setproperly.No Paper Sensor is defective.

011 STANDBY B, C Paper Tray is not installed properly.

Connector is not installed properly.

012 RCV C, D The length of the received document is over 2 m.

Transmitter Document Jam.

017 Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper Tray.

Paper size is incorrect.

030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not go ON within 10 seconds after the document starts feeding.

Document is not set properly.Defective Read Point Sensor.

031 XMTCOPY

C Transmitting document was longerthan 2 meter (or 78.7 in).

The document may jam.Defective Read Point Sensor.

041 STANDBYRCV

COPY

B, C, D Out of Toner. No toner.Defective Low Toner Sensor.

043 STANDBYRCV

COPY

B, C, D Low Toner. Toner is getting low.Defective Low Toner Sensor.

045 STANDBY - No Toner Cartridge. Toner Cartridge has not been installed.Defective Toner Cartridge Sensor.

060 - A Printer Cover is open. Cover is not firmly closed.Connectors are not firmly connected.

061 - A ADF Door is open. Door is not firmly closed.Connectors are not firmly connected.

400 XMT B T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

Incorrect number was dialed and the START button was pushed.Telephone line was disconnected while dialing.SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective.Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED)

130APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for CFR or FTT.

Your machine's ID Number is not programmed.Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password.

402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for NSF/DIS.

Receiver working in non-CCITT mode only. (Possible incompatibility)

403 RCV(Polling)

B Transmitter had no polling function.

"POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter.

404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) followed by TCF three times, but the receiver did not respond. (CFR or FTT is usually returned)

Receiver is defective. (Modem)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.Receiver disconnects line during first NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.

405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it transmitted TCF at 2400bps.Received RTN after communicating at 2400 bps.

Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged due to line noise)Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

406 RCV(Password

Comm.)

B XMT-Password mismatched.RCV-Password mismatched.Selective RCV incomplete.

XMT, RCV password does not match.Last 4 digits of TSI does not match withthe last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBRtelephone number.

407 XMT D Transmitter received no response after it transmitted post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or received DCN.

Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper jamming, etc.) Receiver ceased receiving because of excessive error. (Line quality is poor) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.

Receiver receives data with error. (Line quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it transmitted a post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.

Receiver receives data with error due to poor line quality, and receiving operator requests voice contact.Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.)

Interface or line is faulty.Transmitter is defective.

411 RCV(Polling)

B Received DCN after transmitting NSC.

Transmitter is not ready for polling communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver.

412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After transmitting FTT)

Transmitter is defective.SC PCB is defective.

414 RCV(Polling)

B No response received after transmitting 3rd NSC.

Password does not match between transmitter and receiver.Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.)

Fax Information CodesCode Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause

131APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
415 XMT(Polling)

B Remote side attempted to receive message from your machine in polling communication.

Inform the remote side that your machine does not have the polling transmission feature.

416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post command, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.

Transmitter is defective.Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is distorted due to line noise)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in response to post message.

Line quality is poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in response to PRI-Q from transmitter. (Transmitting operator requests voice contact)

Line quality is poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

Incorrect incoming call type (voice). (Non-facsimile communication)Transmitter is defective.SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

421 RCV B Busy Tone is detected after sending NSF Signal.

Remote station disconnected the line.Wrong number is dialed.

422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC (or DTC) was invalid.

There is an incompatibility.

427 G3 RCV

B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS transmitted.

The interface is incompatible.

434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did not turn OFF within 180 sec. after receiver detected FLAG signal.

Remote unit is defective.SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting FTT.

Transmitter is defective or incompatible.Line quality is poor.

456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used.

457 RELAY XMT CONF. XMT/

POLL

B Remote unit does not have Relayed XMT or Confidential Comm. capability.

459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality is poor. (Training signal is distorted due to line noise)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the limit (Function Parameter No. 70) of 64 lines.

Line quality is poor.SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was more than 10 sec. when receiver received message data.

Transmitter is defective.Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged due to line noise)SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

495 XMT RCV

C During reception, CD turned OFF or continued ON for long time. During communication, lost loop - current.

Line is disconnected.Transmitter is defective.SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.


132APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn ON.

FXB PCB is defective.

501 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B Remote unit does not have compatible Modem.

502 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF or continued ON for long time. During communication, lost loop - current.

Line is disconnected.Transmitter is defective.SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.

503 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn ON during training.

FXB PCB is defective.Line is disconnected.

504 RCV/V.34(Polling)

B Polling is rejected from the remote station.

No polling original is set.

505 XMT/V.34(Polling)

B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set.

540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd CTC or DCN received.

Incompatible interface.

541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd EOR or received DCN.

Line is faulty.FXB PCB abnormal.

542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR transmitted or received DCN.

Remote unit is abnormal.

543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without MCF.

Remote unit is abnormal.

544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Transmission.

Line is faulty.FXB PCB abnormal.

550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C has elapsed.

Defective remote station.

554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving EOR.

Line is faulty.

555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving EOR.

Line is faulty and Operator Call requested by RX side.

570 RCV B Password or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication.

571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function.

580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit 155) OFF.

Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function.

581 XMT B Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.


582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.


601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission.

623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built-in dialer engaged)

Operator removed the original from the ADF after dialing was completed.Original was not set properly in the ADF.


133APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
630 XMT or RCV(Polling)

B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone is not detected. (destination dependent)Busy tone is detected. (destination dependent) T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without a signal from the receiver.

631 XMT A "STOP" button was pressed during Auto Dialing.

634 XMT B Redial count over with no response or busy tone was not detected.Note:

U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected.

Telephone line cable is disconnected.Wrong number is dialed.SC or FXB PCB is abnormal.

638 XMT LAN Power turned Off with applicable data in memory or during communication.

Power switched off. Power failure occurred.

700 XMT RCV

PSTNLAN

Communication terminated by Operator pressing the "STOP" key.

711 RCV LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect.

712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied from the Mail Server.

Mail Server received an incorrect email address. (Dependent on Server's Mail application)

714 XMT RCV

LAN LAN Interface error.Cannot logon to the LAN.

The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not connected.An unexpected LAN problem occurred.Check the SC PCB connector.

715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set.Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address.

716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set.No email application is activated on the Mail Server.

717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol transmission.

Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.Mail Server is defective.

718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred while receiving printing data. The paper size selected within your application to print is larger than the paper size loaded in the Tray(s).

Check the document size and resolution.Ask originator to re-send in a supported size and resolution.

719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a format that is not supported.

Ask the originator to re-send with a supported file attachment:

* In a TIFF-F format.* Image data conforming to A4/Letter size.

720 POP LAN Unable to connect with the POP Server.

Incorrect POP Server address is set.POP Server is down.


134APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set.

722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network Parameters (such as: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, etc.) from the DHCP server.

LAN Cable is disconnected.DHCP is not available.(Contact the Network Administrator.)

725 XMT POP

LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.DNS Server is down.

726 XMT POP

LAN Received an error response from the DNS Server.

Incorrect POP Server address is set.Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.

727 XMT LAN Received an Error or No Response from the RemoteInternet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT)

Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT. (Retry is possible)

728 XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory Overflow or No Power. (Retry is not possible)

729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP AUTHENTICATION) when connecting with the SMTP server.

SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name and/or Password are incorrect.(Contact the Network Administrator.)

730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet parameters or the autodialer with Email from a PC.

Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is set to 2: Valid.

731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Transmission Request was received.

Dial buffer for manual number dialing (70 stations) are being used.

741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name before dialing with Timer Controlled Communications, etc.

800 Relay Comm.

PSTN The machine was requested to relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability.

814 Conf. XMT Conf. Polling

Relay Comm.

The remote station does not have Relay XMT nor Confidential Communication capability.

815 Conf. RCV Mailbox is full.816 Conf. Polled "The received Polling Password

did not match. The machine does not have Confidential Comm. capability."

825 Conf. RCVConf. Polled

Parameter settings of the initial sending station are not properly set.

826 RCV B If applicable sub-address is not registered in the phone book of the receiver side when using sub-addressing function.

Receiver side does not have correct sub-address in their phone book.

870 MEM XMT Multi-Copy

PSTN Memory overflow occurred while storing documents into memory.


135APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
879 MemoryRCV

PSTN Memory overflow occurred during substitute memory reception.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.

LAN Memory overflow.Mail Server sent a reset command while downloading the data to the machine.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.Mail server aborted the download (Busy with other higher priority jobs).

880 - - File Access Error.884 - - File Access Error.961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.

LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.


136APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.9. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service technician to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.

Journal Example

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

DataDefinition

Manufacturer Code

0 -1 Casio2 Canon3 Sanyo4 Sharp5 Tamura6 Toshiba7 NEC8 Oki9 HitachiA XeroxB FujitsuC MatsushitaD MitsubishiE MurataF Ricoh

************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********

NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC

01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000

********************************** - UF-9000/DP-180/190 - ****** -12345678901234567890- *******

- PANASONIC UF-9000/DP-180/190

1st digit 13th digit

137APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2nd Digit-: Not used/defined

3rd Digit-: Not used/defined


DataDefinition

ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button0 - - - -1 Received - - -2 - Received - -3 Received Received - -4 - - Received -5 Received - Received -6 - Received Received -7 Received Received Received -8 - - - Pressed9 Received - - PressedA - Received - PressedB Received Received - PressedC - - Received PressedD Received - Received PressedE - Received Received PressedF Received Received Received Pressed


DataDefinition

Resolution (dpi) Paper Width0 - A41 S-Fine A42 400 x 400 A43 300 x 300 A44 - -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 600 x 600 A49 - -A - -B - -C - -D - -E - -F - -

138APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4th Digit-: Not used/defined



DataDefinition

Scanning Rate Resolution0 20 ms/line Std1 5 ms/line Std2 10 ms/line Std3 - Std4 40 ms/line Std5 - Std6 - Std7 0 ms/line Std8 20 ms/line Fine9 5 ms/line FineA 10 ms/line FineB - FineC 40 ms/line FineD - FineE - FineF 0 ms/line Fine


DataDefinition

Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Memory/Non-Memory

0 - Manual Communication

Non-Memory

1 Used Manual Communication

Non-Memory

2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory8 - Manual

CommunicationMemory

9 Used Manual Communication

Memory

A - Auto Dialing MemoryB Used Auto Dialing MemoryC - Auto RCV MemoryD Used Auto RCV MemoryE - Remote RCV MemoryF Used Remote RCV Memory

139APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190



DataDefinition

Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm. Password Comm.

0 - RCV Off Off1 Yes RCV Off Off2 - XMT Off Off3 Yes XMT Off Off4 - RCV On Off5 Yes RCV On Off6 - XMT On Off7 Yes XMT On Off8 - RCV Off On9 Yes RCV Off OnA - XMT Off OnB Yes XMT Off OnC - RCV On OnD Yes RCV On OnE - XMT On OnF Yes XMT On On


DataDefinition

Sub-Address Comm.

Confidential Comm. Relayed Comm. Turnaround

Polling0 - - - -1 Yes - - -2 - Yes - -3 Yes Yes - -4 - - Yes -5 Yes - Yes -6 - Yes Yes -7 Yes Yes Yes -8 - - - Yes9 Yes - - YesA - Yes - YesB Yes Yes - YesC - - Yes YesD Yes - Yes YesE - Yes Yes YesF Yes Yes Yes Yes

140APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190



DataDefinition

Advanced Comm.

Cover Sheet XMT

0 - -1 Report XMT -2 Check & Call -3 - -4 Memory Transfer -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 - Yes9 Report XMT YesA Check & Call YesB - YesC Memory Transfer YesD - YesE - YesF - Yes


DataDefinition

Short Protocol Standard/ Non-Standard

0 - Standard1 - Standard2 - Standard3 - Standard4 - Standard5 - Standard6 - Standard7 - Standard8 - Non-Standard9 B Non-StandardA - Non-StandardB D Non-StandardC - Non-StandardD - Non-StandardE - Non-StandardF - Non-Standard

141APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190



DataDefinition

Coding ECM0 MH -1 MR -2 MMR -3 - -4 - -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 MH Yes9 MR YesA MMR YesB - -C - -D - -E - -F - -


DataDefinition

Symbol Rate (V.34) V.34

0 - -1 - -2 - -3 - -4 - -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 2400 sr Yes9 - -A 2800 sr YesB 3000 sr YesC 3200 sr YesD 3429 sr YesE - -F - -

142APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190



DataDefinition

Modem Speed Modem Speed (V.34)

0 2400 bps -1 4800 bps 2400 bps2 7200 bps 4800 bps3 9600 bps 7200 bps4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps6 12000 bps 14400 bps7 14400 bps 16800 bps8 - 19200 bps9 - 21600 bpsA - 24000 bpsB - 26400 bpsC - 28800 bpsD - 31200 bpsE - 33600 bpsF - -


DataDefinition

Line Status0 -1 Private Line2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F -

143APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.10. Troubleshooting (For Printer)4.10.1. Checking the Basics

4.10.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.

If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:

• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly • Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct• Ensure that the Unit is turned On• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit• No error message is displayed on the Unit • Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box

Problem Possible Solution(s)Character is not printing in the correct positions or the characters near the edges of the page are missing.

• Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printerdriver to coincide with the application.

• Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.• Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device

requires minimum margins of 1⁄4 inches (5 mm) on all sides.The font type is incorrect • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.

• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font inthe Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select ”Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the PrinterDriver Properties dialog box.

The character is not smooth.Fine line print cannot be obtained.

• Select 600 dpi resolution.

Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.Different character or symbol from the document is printed.

• Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.

The printer does not print anything or prints irregular images from the middle of the 1st page.

• Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install anExpansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in theQuality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select 300 dpi resolution.

• Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.

144APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.10.3. Error Message Appears on the PC

4.10.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

4.10.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Error Message Possible Solution(s)Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/

is 100Base-TX cable properly connected.• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)

Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someonefs print job,please wait, and try again later.

• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.Cannot print because an error is found in the current printer setting.

• Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with theapplication and the printer driver settings.

Error Message• The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be

enough to complete the print job. Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the

resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.• The print settings may not be matched for the system.

Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Propertiesdialog box.i.e. Multi-sized printing.

Cannot complete print job Image memory overflow

Cannot print System error

Cannot complete Confirm print condition

• Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties dialog box.

Problem Possible Solution(s)

Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.

145APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5 Service Modes5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.

5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service ModeThe service mode is selected when “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” and “3” keys are sequentially pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.

2. To exit the Service ModeThe service mode is reset when the “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions

Service Modes (For Copier)Service Mode Item Function

F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD

and LEDs.02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page

Memory.03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper

position alignment.04 Print Test Pattern 2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the

Paper position alignment.05 Print Test Pattern 3 Prints the Grid pattern for setting the

Paper position alignment.06 Print Test Pattern 4 Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex

Paper position alignment.F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key

is pressed.F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start

key is pressed.F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items

(selected item numbers) is checked.F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by

code numbers) can be changed.F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by

code numbers) can be adjusted.F7 Electronic Counter Electronic Counters for MaintenanceF8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item

(selected by code numbers)

146APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
F9 Unit Maintenance

00 Fax Function Parameter01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a

machine malfunction occurs.02 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version for SC,

SC Boot, PNL, SPC, Fax Option, Slot 1.03 Print Device Info. F5/F6 Parameter, Machine / Counter /

System Address / RAM Address infomations.

04 RAM Edit Mode Relative / Absolute Address.05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for

Maintenance.06 RAM Initialize Each RAM date clear.

Except F5, F6 Settings - refer to F6-99 "F5/F6 Initialization"

07 Firmware Update Updates the firmware in the machine Firmware Card or the USB.

08 Program Backup Refer to Sect. 3.5.09 Update Prog. Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using

the Firmware Update Kit.10 Program Copy Configuration for Program copy.11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).

Service Modes (For Copier)Service Mode Item Function

147APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

F5-00 . . . . . F5-50 Auto contrast adj. Yes F5-01 Frequency desired 60Hz F5-51 Dept. Counter (COPY) NoF5-02 . . . . . F5-52 Dept. Counter (FAX) NoF5-03 . . . . . F5-53 2-sided auto shift NoF5-04 LSU off timer 5 Sec. F5-54 . . . . .F5-05 . . . . . F5-55 . . . . .F5-06 . . . . . F5-56 . . . . .F5-07 . . . . . F5-57 . . . . .F5-08 . . . . . F5-58 . . . . .F5-09 . . . . . F5-59 Ope.add toner alarm Stop

F5-10 Exit Tray Limitation None F5-60 Auto Tray selection YesF5-11 . . . . . F5-61 . . . . .F5-12 . . . . . F5-62 . . . . .F5-13 Paper out Indicator On F5-63 U13 clear Any keysF5-14 Paper size (Tray1) Letter-R F5-64 Dept. Counter (SCAN) NoF5-15 Paper size (Tray2) Letter-R F5-65 Dept. Counter (PRINT) NoF5-16 . . . . . F5-66 . . . . .F5-17 . . . . . F5-67 . . . . .F5-18 . . . . . F5-68 . . . . .F5-19 . . . . . F5-69 Reduce N in 1 space No

F5-20 ADF Auto F5-70 PM cycle 85KF5-21 . . . . . F5-71 . . . . .F5-22 . . . . . F5-72 . . . . .

148APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.FIRMWARE VERSION SC : BAT001xxAU

1.MACHINE INFORMATION MACHINE NAME : UF-9000 MAC ADDRESS : 080023016C81 SERIAL NUMBER :

SC BOOT : V006 PNL : V010018 SPC(SCANNER) : V6493 PRINTER : V00039 FAX MODEM : Ver 6D01 PDL FONT1 : CAV10000b SC2 : CAV13500aAU

3.MEMORY CAPACITY PAGE MEMORY : 32 MB SORT MEMORY : 16 MB FAX MEMRY : 2 MB 4.OPTION 2nd PAPER FEED MODULE : No PCL PRINTER : No PS PRINTER : No HDD : No

5.ERROR LOG TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 503 NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J97 XX-00000008 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J44 XX-00000140 (See Remarks) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

**********-MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

******************************* - - ***** - 0001- *********

Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

Remarks: XX-00000140

00 : Printer Error 02 : Scanner Error

Page Count

-PANASONIC -

149APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

F7-01 Key Operator ID Code : 000

F7-02 Total Count : 295F7-03 PM Count : 295F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 61F7-05 . . . . . : F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 295F7-07 Process Unit Count : 295F7-08 ADF PM Count : 50F7-09 . . . . . :F7-10 . . . . . :

F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 147F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 90F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0F7-14 . . . . . :F7-15 . . . . . :F7-16 2-Sided Count : 28F7-29 . . . . . :F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 73F7-31 . . . . . :F7-32 FLS/LG Count : 0

F7-17 ADF Count : 26F7-18 ADF Read Count : 26F7-19 Scanner Count : 61F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 18

F7-21 Copy Rint Count : 59F7-22 Copy Scan Count : 180

F7-23 PC Rint Count : 0F7-24 PC Scan Count : 3

F7-24 Fax Transmit Count : 24F7-24 Fax Receive Count : 27F7-24 Fax Print Count : 21

Serial Number :

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

150APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.3. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test

Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.↓

Press the "START" key.↓

Select “1:Check Input“ or “2:Check Output“ to activate the test then press "START" key.↓

Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.↓

When the “CLEAR” key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted.↓

Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

1. Check Input

2. Check Output Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.

F4 Mode (Check Input)

No. Function Condition Message Display Remarks7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

021 Home Position Sensor Home position is detected.

1

ADF Cover Open Sensor ADF Cover is open. 1

F4 Mode (Check Output)No. Item Function Remark120 Lamp When SPC PCB P103-8, Inverter

CN1-2 signal level changes to 0V from Open, Lamp operates.

The CCD / Inverter shall be replaced as the Assembly

151APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.4. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.↓


Enter the desired code number or press “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.↓

Press the "SET" key.↓

Enter the desired function code number and press “SET” key.↓


Press “STOP” key, then press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.↓

Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

F5 ModeNo. Item Function Default Setting00 Not Used01 Frequency Desired 0 : Auto

1 : 50 Hz2 : 60Hz

2 (for USA / Canada)

1 (for Europe)02-03 Not Used

04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec. 2 : 10 sec. 3 : 15 sec. 4 : 20 sec. 6 : 30 sec. 8 : 40 sec.10 : 50 sec.12 : 60 sec.

1

05-09 Not Used10 Exit Tray Limitation

(Up to 150 Sheets)0 : None1 : Accumulate2 : Job

0(Effective from June 2004 Production)

11 Replace Drum(Except USA / Canada)

0 : Off1 : User (Displays Replace Drum)2 : Service (Enables Check & Call

function)

1 (for Others)2 (for Germany)(Effective from Oct. 2004 Production)

12 Not Used13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : On

1 : Off0

14 Paper Size (Tray 1)(UF-9000)

4 : A4-R12 : LEGAL14 : LETTER-R


4 (for Europe / Others)

Paper Size (Tray 1)(DP-180/190)

4 : A4-R 6 : B5-R 8 : A5-R12 : LEGAL14 : LETTER-R

152APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
15 Paper Size (Tray 2)(UF-9000)

4 : A4-R12 : LEGAL14 : LETTER-R 14 (for USA / Canada)

4 (for Europe / Others)Paper Size (Tray 2)(DP-180/190)

4 : A4-R 6 : B5-R 12 : LEGAL14 : LETTER-R

16-19 Not Used20 ADF 0 : No

1 : Auto1

21-37 Not Used38 Duplex Mode Default

(UF-9000)0 : No1 : 1 to 22 : 2 to 2

0

39 Not Used40 Double Count 0 : No

2 : LGL0 : UF-9000/DP-190

41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed1 : At exit

1

42 KEY/DEPT. Counter 0 : No2 : DEPT.

2

43 Key Counter Timing Same as F5-41 044-49 Not Used

50 Auto Contrast Adjust 0 : No1 : Yes

1

51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No1 : Yes

0

52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No1 : Yes

0

53-58 Not Used59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop

1 : Continue0

60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No1 : Yes

1

61-62 Not Used63 U13 Clear

(DP-180/190 only)0 : Any keys1 : Func + 1

0

64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : No1 : Yes

0

65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : No1 : Yes

0

66-68 Not Used69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No

1 : Yes0

F5 ModeNo. Item Function Default Setting

153APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
70 PM Cycle 0 : No 1 : 1.5 K 2 : 2.5 K 3 : 5 K 4 : 10 K 5 : 15 K 6 : 20 K 7 : 30 K 8 : 40 K 9 : 60 K10 : 85 K*11 : 90 K12 : 120 K13 : 150 K14 : 200 K15 : 240 K

0 (for UF-9000)Effective from April 2004 Production

10 (for DP-180/190)

* Effective from June 2004 Production

71-78 Not Used79 Image Process Method 0 : Error Diffusion

1 : Dither0

80 Paper Size Priority 4 : A4-R 5 : B5 7 : A5 9 : FLS110 : FLS212 : LEGAL14 : LETTER-R


4 (for Europe / Others)

81 Foolscap Size 1 : FLS12 : FLS2

1

82 Not Used83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : Off

1 : On0

84 Paper Tray Priority 0 : S > C > B1 : C > S > B

0

85 Side Void Setting (ADF) 0 : No1 : Yes

0

86 PM Cycle (Optics) 0 : No1 : 40 K2 : 60 K3 : 120 K4 : 240 K5 : 360 K6 : 480 K7 : 600 K

0

87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No1 : 40 K2 : 60 K3 : 120 K4 : 240 K5 : 360 K6 : 480 K7 : 600 K

0


154APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
88 USB Port Function 0 : Off1 : Once2 : On

0

89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 1 : 10 Half 2 : 10 Full 3 : 100 Half 4 : 100 Full

0

90 Beep Sound 0 : Off1 : Soft2 : Loud

1

91-94 Not Used95 Paper Size (FA)

(Factory use only)0 : Japan1 : USA/CAN2 : Europe3 : Other

1 (for USA / Canada)2 (for Europe)

96-97 Not Used


155APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.5. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)








Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).Note:

1. The Factory Setting is different in each model.2. The machine may accept a (+/-) input value that exceeds the specified Setting Range for the

parameters in the table; however, the actual registered value will not exceed the Upper/Lower Limitation value.

F6 Mode

No. Item Remarks Setting Range

00-02 Not Used03 Original Registration Adjustment of platen original registration

detection timing.-30 - +30 0.2mm

04 Printer Registration Delay time is adjusted from registration roller clutch ON.

-50 - +16 0.5mm

05-06 Not Used07 Registration Void Registration void should be adjusted. 0 - +99

0.5mm08 Trail Edge Read Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - 0

0.5mm09 Trail Edge Print Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - +15

0.5mm10 Side Adjust (Bypass) Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). -8 - +7

0.5mm11 Side Adjust (Tray 1) Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). -8 - +7

0.5mm12 Side Adjust (Tray 2) Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). -8 - +7

0.5mm13-15 Not Used

16 Side Adjust (ADU) Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU). -8 - +7 0.5mm

17-32 Not Used33 TDC Max. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99

(Read only)34 TDC Min. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99

(Read only)

156APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
35 TDC Avg. Read Only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -99 - +99 (Read only)

36-38 Not Used39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. -32 - +3240 Trans Current Side 1 Adjustment of Transfer Current. -77 - +76

0.15uA41-43 Not Used

44 FAX Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for FAX. (-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

45 Not Used46 PRINTER Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for Printer.

(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

47-48 Not Used49 TEXT Image Density Image density adjustment for Text mode.

(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

50 T/P Image Density Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo mode.(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

51 PHOTO Image Density Image density adjustment for Photo mode.(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-99 - +99

52 Not Used53 CCD Read Position Adjustment of CCD read position. -42 - +44

0.2mm54 TEXT Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode. -128 - +12755 T/P Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode. -128 - +12756 PHOTO Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode. -128 - +127

57-62 Not Used63 Lead Edge Read Timing Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point. 0 - +9

0.5mm64 Side Edge Read Adjust Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point. 0 - +9

0.5mm65-66 Not Used

67 ADF Image Density Compensation of ADF image density. -99 - +9968 Not Used69 Stamp Position Adjust Adjustment of verification stamp position. -50 - +50

0.3mm70-78 Not Used

79 MTF Adjust Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.

-2 - +2

80-89 Not Used90 ADF Image Read Start Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read

start position. -99 - +99 0.05mm

F6 Mode


157APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.6. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter









91 Original Lead ADF Adjustment of original detection timing. -99 - +99 0.3mm

92 Original Trail ADF Adjustment of trail edge detection timing. -90 - +127 0.3mm

93-98 Not Used99 F5/F6 Initialization Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.

F7 ModeNo. Item Remarks01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for access to the

counter mode.02 Total Count Total count for all copies / prints.03 PM Count Preventive Maintenance count.04 Scanner PM Count PM count for scanner readings.05 Not Used06 OPC Drum Count PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC

Drum.07 Process Unit Count PM count of recording paper fed through the

Process Unit.08 ADF PM Count PM count of originals fed through the ADF.

09-10 Not Used11 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet bypass.12 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray.13 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray.

14-15 Not Used16 2-sided Count Total count of 2-sided Print.17 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the ADF.18 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through the ADF.

F6 Mode


158APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.7. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment








19 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations.20 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.21 Copy Print Count Total count of copies printed.22 Copy Scan Count Total count of copies scanned.23 PC Print Count Total count printed from PC.24 PC Scan Count Total count scanned to PC.25 Fax Transmit Count Total count of Fax transmitted.26 Fax Receive Count Total count of Fax received.27 Fax Print Count Total count of Fax printed.

28-29 Not Used30 A4R / LETTER R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.31 Not Used32 FLS / LEGAL Count Total count of FLS / Legal Print.99 All Counter Clear All counters are cleared.

F8 ModeNo. Item Remarks

00-05 Not Used06 Error Log View a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine

errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest code.

Note:Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.

07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.A Message "Error code can be cleared with the Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*

b) Press the Start key.08 (Factory use only) Lock operation for Scanner Unit.

09-17 Not Used18 C18 PRT PWM ADJ.PTN.

(LSU PWM Pattern)Print out the Test Pattern.Proceed when the LSU is replaced.


159APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
19 Move Mirror To Lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the locked position for transporting the copier.

b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will not accept any numerical key input.

Note:The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again.

20-46 Not Used47 C47 ADF Scan Test Place the document on the ADF first.

Press START key to begin.48 C48 Book Scan Test Press START key to begin.

Press STOP key to finish.49-54 Not Used


160APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.1.8. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance









F9 ModeService Mode Item Remarks

F9 Unit Maintenance

00 Fax Function Parameter01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a

machine malfunction occurs.02 Firmware

Version00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC

Boot.02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.03 SPC (Scanner) Displays the firmware version for SPC.04 Printer Displays the firmware version.05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX

Option 1.06 Not Used07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.

03 Print Device Info.

00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5 and F6 modes.

01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.02 Counter Information Prints the Counter information list.03 System Address

Info.Prints the system memory setting.

04 RAM Address Information

Prints the RAM data dump list.

04 RAM Edit Mode

1 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.2 Absolute Address Setting of Real address.

05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for Maintenance.Clears by Shipment Set.

161APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
F9 Unit Maintenance

06 RAM Initialize

00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function parameters to default values.

01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.02 LBP Error Log Clear Clears LBP Error log03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,

Parameter Initialize & Resets the Counters (Fax).

04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.05 Dept. Counter Clear

07 FirmwareUpdate

00 Update FROM Card Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card.

01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine with the USB.

08 ProgramBackup(Refer toSect. 3.5.)

00 Main Onboard F-ROM 4MB01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)04 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB05 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)06 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)

09 Update Prog. Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB Flash Memory Card will be required depending upon the model.

10 ProgramCopy

00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.01 From card to slot 202 From slot 1 to card03 From slot 1 to slot 204 From slot 2 to card05 From slot 2 to slot 1

11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).

F9 ModeService Mode Item Remarks

162APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure

1. To enter the Fax Service Modea. Press “FAX/EMAIL” key.b. Press “FUNCTION” and then “7” keys.c. Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.d. Enter the desired code number or press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.

2. To exit the Fax Service ModePress “STOP” key.

Note:The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:

5.2.2. FAX Service Mode TableThe following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit.

"START" : The new setting value is stored in the machine."V" : Scroll the function parameter number down."/\" : Scroll the function parameter number up.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)No. Service Mode Description00 Not Used01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position,

etc.).02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer

Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order Form.

04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem.

05 Not Used06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function

parameters.Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

07 Not Used08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,

Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter

Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.

163APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
10 Firmware Version

00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC Boot.02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.03 SPC (Scanner) Displays the firmware version for SPC.04 Not Used05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX.06 Not Used07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)No. Service Mode Description

164APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.

Enter the desired code number and press “START” key.↓

If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.↓

Select the desired function code and press the "START" key.↓


Press “STOP” key, then press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Function Parameter TableNo. Parameter Selections Function000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor

2 = Tel/DialSelects whether the machine starts to TX automatically during On-Hook dialing.Monitor : Start to TX after pressing STARTTEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically

001 Alarm Status 1 = Off2 = Timer3 = Constant

Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.OFF : Alarm is disabled.Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is

pressed or the error is cleared/corrected.

002 Stop Comm. JRNL

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the machine prompts to print the COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication.

003 Continuous Poll 1 = Off2 = Stn (Tx only)3 = Hub (Rx only)

Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is enabled.Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,

then press the assigned Program Key to store or add the documents into a polled file. (See Note 1)

Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the machine will continuously poll originals from the remote stations until it is interrupted by pressing "STOP".

004 Numeric ID Set 1 = Off (will not accept)2 = On (accepts)

Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to set or change the Numeric ID.

165APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
005 Destination Code(DP-180/190 only)

000 : Austria001 : U.K.002 : Canada003 : Denmark004 : Taiwan005 : Finland006 : Germany007 : Netherlands008 : Italy009 : Spanish010 : Hong Kong011 : Australia012 : Switzerland013 : Norway015 : Portuguese016 : Ireland017 : Belgium018 : Sweden019 : Turkey020 : U.S.A.021 : France022 : New Zealand025 : Japan029 : Poland030 : Czech031 : Russia032 : Greece033 : Hungary034 : Indonesia035 : South Korea038 : Malaysia039 : China045 : Thailand048 : South Africa049 : Singapore050 : Universal051 : East Euro999 : Initialize

Specified destinations only.

006 ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID)2 = Chara (Character ID)

Selects the priority of displaying the ID.

007 JRNL Column 1 = Station2 = RCV’D ID

Selects the contents of the ID to display on the Journal.

008 Monitor 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for monitoring fax signals.(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)

009 DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal)2 = On (Off Hook)

Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back communication test.

010 TX Level 00 = 0 dBm~15 = -15 dBm

Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm steps.

Function Parameter TableNo. Parameter Selections Function

166APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
011 RX Level 1 = -43 dBm2 = -38 dBm3 = -33 dBm4 = -48 dBm

Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 dBm.

012 DTMF Level 00 = 0 dBm~15 = -15 dBm

Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm steps.

013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB2 = 4dB3 = 8dB4 = 12dB

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.

014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB2 = 4dB3 = 8dB4 = 12dB

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.

015 ~ 016

Not Used

017 TX Start 2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bpsTC7200 bpsTC9600 bps12000 bps14400 bps

Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32.

018 RX Start 2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bpsTC7200 bpsTC9600 bps12000 bps14400 bps

Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33.

019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off2 = On3 = Select

Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,

when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing.

020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Select the ECM mode.

021 EP Tone 1 = Off (without EP Tone)2 = On (with EP Tone)

Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode.(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)On : AddOff : Do not add

022 Signal Interval 1 = 100 ms2 = 200 ms3 = 500 ms

Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal.

023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short)2 = Long

Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short

024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)2 = 2100 Hz

Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz


167APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First2 = Second

Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT and Polling).(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

026 Non-Standard 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects own mode (Panafax mode).

027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects the short protocol mode.

028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.

029 Remote Diagnostics

1 = Off (will not accept)2 = On (accepts)

Selects whether the machine accepts Remote Diagnostics from the service station.

030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms2 = 1 sec

Selects the pause interval between the CED and the 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6)2 = On (EOLx12)

Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.

032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.033 V34 RX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34

communication, 33600-2400 bps.Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.

034 V34 TX SR 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.035 V34 RX SR 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/

3000/2800/2400 sr.Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.

036 Not Used037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed)

2 = On (displayed)Selects whether to display the modem speed during communication. (Press the Job Status Key to display)

038 Not Used039 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms

~100 = 1000 ms

Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key.

040 Flash Time (PSTN)

5 = 50 ms~100 = 1000 ms

Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key.(For Germany, Austria and Czech)

041 Pause Time 1 = 1 sec.~10 = 10 sec.

Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for dialing through a switchboard or for international calls.

042 Not Used043 Redial Interval 0 = no waiting

~15 = 15 minutes

Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 minute steps.


168APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
044 Redial Count 0 = no redial~15 = 15 times

0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only)

Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step intervals.Note:

In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.

045 Ring Detect Count

1 = 1 ring~9 = 9 rings

Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1 ring step intervals.

046 On-Hook Time 0 = 0 sec.~90 = 90 sec.

Selects the on-hook time between sequential communication calls in 1 second step intervals.

047 Response Wait Interval

1 = 1 sec.~90 = 90 sec.

20 ~ 150 sec. (For France Only)

Selects the waiting interval for the response after completing the dialing.

048~ 049

Not Used

050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal2 = Rough

Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals.

051 Not Used052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps

2 = 20 ppsSelects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.

053~ 054

Not Used

055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.

056 Dial Tone Check(Specified destinations only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number.

057 DC Loop Check(Specified destinations only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication.

058 Comm. JRNL + Image

1 = Off (without image)2 = On (with image)

Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. Journal with image.

059 Confidential RCV Report

1 = Off (does not print out)2 = On (prints out)

Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential RCV Report.

060 Version Indicates the Host software version.

061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:******RX:****** CPY:******

Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and copied document count.

062 Print Counter 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61.

063~ 067

Not Used


169APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
068 NYSE Fax Forward(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the machine will forward the incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.Note:

Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled, an Access Code of "0000" is automatically assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new setting added called "NYSE".

069 NYSE Local Print(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Inc2 = On (Always)

Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes after FAX Forwarding.INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.ON : Always prints.

070 Line Error 128 lines256 lines512 lines1024 line2048 linesOff(will not disconnect line)

1. Selects the line disconnect condition during reception. If the number of line errors exceed this setting, the unit will disconnect the line.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or

RTN/PIN. (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") (See Note 1)

071 Total Error 1 = 5%2 = 10%3 = 15%4 = 20%

Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN.(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)(See Note 2)

072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited)2 = 3 lines/STD3 = 6 lines/STD4 = 12 lines/STD

Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN. (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)

073 Error Detect 1 = Lines2 = Rate

Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.

074 RTN Receive 1 = Disconnect2 = Continue

Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or continue when "RTN" is received.

075 Coding 1 = MH (MH only)2 = MR (MH or MR)3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR)4 = JBIG

Selects the coding scheme.

076 Batch TX(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the batch transmission is available.

077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited)2 = 2 m

Selects the maximum length of a received document that can be printed.

078~ 079

Not Used

080 Doc Top Feed -99~+99

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position.

081 Doc End Feed -90~+127

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position.


170APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
082 JAM Length 1 = 1 m2 = 2 m

Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned.

083 Not Used084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring)

2 = Busy (keep line busy)Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.

085~086

Not Used

087 Darker Level 0 = Lightest Contrast~15 = Darkest Contrast

Selects the contrast level.0← →15Lightest← →Darkest

088 Normal Level089 Lighter Level

090~ 091

Not Used

092 Smoothing 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the smoothing function is available.

093 ~ 094

Not Used

095 Reduction Ratio (70-100) Selects Print Reduction Ratio(%).096 ~ 101

Not Used

102 Book Top Feed -30~+30

Adjustment of original registration detection timing.

103 Book End Feed -9~0

Adjustment of trail edge void.

104~109

Not Used

110 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address.111 Not Used112 Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off

2 = OnSelects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)Note:

After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers.

113~114

Not Used

115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll2 = Direct

Selects the setting method for Time Zone.Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll

through the Time Zone Table.Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone

directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.

116 Overwrite Warning

1 = Yes2 = No

Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email.


171APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.

To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last Program Key will be assigned with the “Store 4 Poll” Key name automatically and cannot be changed.

To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.

(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.)

Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.

117~121

Not Used

122 LDAP 1 = Off2 = On

When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be displayed as different characters.

123 One Ring Sound(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On(Effective from Sept. 2004 Production)

When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out loud, answering on the second ring count.

124 ~ 199

Not Used

SignalSetting

1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:OffMCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 AlwaysRTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -

SignalSetting

1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-


172APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results) From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.

5.2.4.1. Function Parameter ListA list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display.↓

Press the “SET” key.↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1:Function Parameter List".↓

Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

173APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

-PANASONIC -

Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.

***** ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********

000 Mon/Tel Dial:[Monitor] Monitor 050 Ring Det Mode:[Normal] Normal001 Alarm Status:[Timer] Timer 051 ----------002 Stop Comm. JRNL:[On] On 052 Pulse Rate:[10pps] 10pps003 Continuous Polling:[Off] Off 053 ----------004 Numeric ID Set:[On] On 054 ----------005 Destination Code:[999] 999 055 Busy Tone Check:[On] On006 ID Display:[Chara] Chara 056 ----------007 JRNL Column:[Station] Station 057 ----------008 Monitor:[Off] Off 058 Comm.JRNL +Image:[On] On009 DC Loop:[Off] Off 059 Conf.RCV Report:[On] On

010 TX Level:[-11dBm] -11dBm 060 Version: UF-9000 AAV......011 RX Level:[-43dBm] -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY: 000080/000168/000003/000000012 DTMF Level:[-5dBm] -5dBm 062 Print Counter:[Off] Off013 G3 RX EQL:[0dB] 0dB 063 ----------014 G3 TX EQL:[0dB] 0dB 064 ----------015 --------- 065 ----------016 --------- 066 ----------017 TX Start:[14400bps] 14400bps 067 ----------018 RX Start:[14400bps] 14400bps 068 NYSE Fax Forward:[Off] Off019 ITU-T V.34:[On] On 069 NYSE Local Print:[inc] inc

020 ITU-T ECM:[On] On 070 Line Error:[128] 128021 EP Tone:[Off] Off 071 Total Error:[10] 10022 Sig. Interval:[500ms] 500ms 072 Conti. Error:[Off] Off023 TCF Check:[Normal] Normal 073 Error Detect:[Rate] Rate 024 CED Freq.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz 074 RTN Receive:[Discon] Discon025 Comm. Start-Up:[1'st] 1'st 075 Coding:[JBIG] JBIG026 Non-Standard:[On] On 076 Batch TX:[On] On027 Short Protocol B:[On] On 077 RX JAM Length:[2 m] 2 m028 Short Protocol D:[On] On 078 ----------029 Remote Diag.:[On] On 079 ----------

030 CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms 080 Doc Top Feed:[0] 0031 RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off 081 Doc End Feed:[0] 0032 V34TX Start:[33600bps] 33600bps 082 JAM Length:[2 m] 2 m033 V34RX Start:[33600bps] 33600bps 083 ----------034 V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr 084 Line As Nopaper:[Ring] Ring035 V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr 085 ----------036 --------- 086 ----------037 Protocol Display:[Off] Off 087 Darker Level:[2] 2038 --------- 088 Normal Level:[8] 8039 Flash Time:[500ms] 500ms 089 Lighter Level:[14] 14

040 --------- 090 ----------041 Pause Time:[3sec] 3sec 091 ----------042 --------- 092 Smoothing:[On] On043 Redial Interval:[3min] 3min 093 ----------044 Redial Count:[5] 5 094 ----------045 Ring Det. Count:[2] 2 095 Reduction Ratio:[100%] 100%046 On-Hook Time:[5sec] 5sec 096 ----------047 Response Wait:[5sec] 55sec 097 ----------048 --------- 098 ----------049 --------- 099 ----------

174APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02

-PANASONIC -

***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

100 ---------- 150 ----------101 ---------- 151 ----------102 Book Top Feed:[0] 0 152 ----------103 Book End Feed:[0] 0 153 ----------104 ---------- 154 ----------105 ---------- 155 ----------106 ---------- 156 ----------107 ---------- 157 ----------108 ---------- 158 ----------109 ---------- 159 ----------

110 MAC Address: 080023000177 160 ----------111 ---------- 161 ----------112 Insert EMAIL TXT:[Off] Off 162 ----------113 ---------- 163 ----------114 Symbol set:[Std] Std 164 ----------115 Time Zone:[Direct] Direct 165 ----------116 Overwrite Warning:[Yes] Yes 166 ----------117 ---------- 167 ----------118 ---------- 168 ----------119 ---------- 169 ----------

120 ---------- 170 ----------121 ---------- 171 ----------122 LDAP:[On] On 172 ----------123 ---------- 173 ---------- 124 ---------- 174 ----------125 ---------- 175 ----------126 ---------- 176 ----------127 ---------- 177 ----------128 ---------- 178 ----------129 ---------- 179 ----------

130 ---------- 180 ----------131 ---------- 181 ----------132 ---------- 182 ----------133 ---------- 183 ----------134 ---------- 184 ----------135 ---------- 185 ----------136 ---------- 186 ----------137 ---------- 187 ----------138 ---------- 188 ----------139 ---------- 189 ----------

140 ---------- 190 ----------141 ---------- 191 ----------142 ---------- 192 ----------143 ---------- 193 ----------144 ---------- 194 ----------145 ---------- 195 ----------146 ---------- 196 ----------147 ---------- 197 ----------148 ---------- 198 ----------149 ---------- 199 ----------

Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.

175APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4.2. Page Memory TestA test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following procedure.



Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Page Memory Test".↓



SC : TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666SC BOOT : MEMORY SIZE : (2 MB)PNL : MAC ADDRESS : 08002300E078PRINTER : SHIPMENT SETSPC(SCANNER) :FAX MODEM :SC2 :

************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

-PANASONIC -

***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

176APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4.3. Printer ReportAll printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.



Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: Printer Report".↓



**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016

SERIAL NUMBER : CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456

PRINTER :

TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475 RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398 COPY COUNTER : 000083 PRINT COUNTER : 000016

01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016

SC : PNL : SPC (SCANNER) :

-PANASONIC -

***** *******************-PANAFAX -*******-12345678901234567890-**************

FIRMWARE VERSION

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|

||

177APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4.4. All Document FilesPrint the document files from the Flash Memory.



Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "5: All Document Files".↓



178APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4.5. Protocol TracePrint a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.



Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys select the "6: Protocol Trace".↓



*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******

STATUS : OK MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD) SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44

REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR COMMAND LOG.

LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP

REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN

-PANASONIC -

****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************

------------------------------------------------------------------

179APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.4.6. Toner Order FormThe Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.



Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "7: Toner Order Form".↓



180APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(6) Toner Cartridge No. Refer to the Supply list

************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Cartridge No.: (6) Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ /Print your name and title Signature & Date

181APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)5.2.5.1. Binary SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Signal Test".↓


Press the desired number. ↓



Binary Signal Table

Number Signals1 V21 300bps2 V27ter 2400bps3 V27ter 4800bps4 V29 7200bps5 V29 9600bps6 V17 TC7200bps7 V17 TC9600bps8 V17 12000bps9 V17 14400bps

182APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.5.2. Tonal SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.


Press the “SET” key to select the "2: Tonal Test".↓


Press the desired number and press the "START" key.↓


Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals1 462 Hz2 1080 Hz3 1100 Hz4 1300 Hz5 1650 Hz6 1850 Hz7 2100 Hz

183APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.5.3. DTMF SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

• DTMF Single TonePress the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.

↓Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".

↓Press the “SET” key.

↓Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "1. Single".

↓Press the desired number and press the "START" key.

↓Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

• DTMF Dual TonePress the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.

↓Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".

↓Press the “SET” key.

↓Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "2. Dual".

↓Press the desired number and press the "START" key.


DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table

Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz5 1209 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz6 1336 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz

8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz

184APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34)


Press the “SET” key to select the "4: V34 MODEM".↓


Press the desired number and press the "START" key.↓


Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps02 V34 2400 sr 4800 bps 23 V34 3000 sr 12000 bps 44 V34 3429 sr 7200 bps03 V34 2400 sr 7200 bps 24 V34 3000 sr 14400 bps 45 V34 3429 sr 9600 bps04 V34 2400 sr 9600 bps 25 V34 3000 sr 16800 bps 46 V34 3429 sr 12000 bps05 V34 2400 sr 12000 bps 26 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps 47 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps06 V34 2400 sr 14400 bps 27 V34 3000 sr 21600 bps 48 V34 3429 sr 16800 bps07 V34 2400 sr 16800 bps 28 V34 3000 sr 24000 bps 49 V34 3429 sr 19200 bps08 V34 2400 sr 19200 bps 29 V34 3000 sr 26400 bps 50 V34 3429 sr 21600 bps09 V34 2400 sr 21600 bps 30 V34 3000 sr 28800 bps 51 V34 3429 sr 24000 bps10 V34 2800 sr 4800 bps 31 V34 3200 sr 4800 bps 52 V34 3429 sr 26400 bps11 V34 2800 sr 7200 bps 32 V34 3200 sr 7200 bps 53 V34 3429 sr 28800 bps12 V34 2800 sr 9600 bps 33 V34 3200 sr 9600 bps 54 V34 3429 sr 31200 bps13 V34 2800 sr 12000 bps 34 V34 3200 sr 12000 bps 55 V34 3429 sr 33600 bps14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps

185APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.Note:

This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "6: RAM initialize" on the display.↓

Press the “SET” key to select the desired Mode number.↓

Press the "SET" key to initialize RAM.↓


RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default

values.Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

02 JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents.03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys.05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number

80 and 81, then set default values.08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

186APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)5.2.7.1. OverviewThis feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:

1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-

registered telephone number or email address.4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically

transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "08 Check & Call" on the display.↓

Press the “SET” key to select the desired code number.(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL" Mode key and input the email address.)

↓Press the "SET" key.


5.2.7.2. Printer Reports• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted1. Manual print

The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)2. Automatic transmission/printout

a. Service Alert ReportWhen the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.

b. Maintenance Alert ReportWhen the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.

c. Toner Order FormWhen the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre-registered order information.

d. Call Counter ReportWhen the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.

Note:The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).

187APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report

Error Code Log Tx

Report Remarks

Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.3.)E13 Out of Toner.Jxx Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.2.)Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.1.)U13 M Low Toner.

188APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT


(1) Customer ID(2) Firmware Version(3) Counter Information(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

**************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < ****************************

(1)

(2)

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

FIRMWARE VERSION

(3)

(4)

COUNTER INFORMATION: CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT

F7-02 Total Count : 13 240000 2-Sided Count : 0PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10ADF Count : 1 ------ OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ Process Unit Count : 13 (------)ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1

ADF Read Count : 1Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4

F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 01st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 62nd Paper Tray Count : 10

F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0

FAX Print Count : 0

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | | | | |

| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

SC : SPC :

189APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT


5.2.7.5. Toner Order Form

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”(2) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(3) Firmware Version(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters


**************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < ****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)

FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

(4) TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082 COPY COUNTER : 000000 PRINT COUNTER : 000000

-LOGO PANASONIC -

************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

SC : SPC :

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

190APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(6) Toner Cartridge No. Refer to the Supply list

************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Cartridge No.: (6) Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ /Print your name and title Signature & Date

191APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT


(1) Customer ID(2) Firmware Version(3) Counter Information(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value


***************************************************************** > SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE < *****************************************************************

(1)

(2)

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

FIRMWARE VERSION

(3)

(4)

COUNTER INFORMATION: CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT

PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10ADF Count : 1 ------ A3/LEDGER Count : 0OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ B4/LEGAL Count : 0Process Unit Count : 13 (------)ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1Fuser Web Count : 240986 ADF Read Count : 1Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4

F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 01st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 62nd Paper Tray Count : 103rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 04th Paper Tray Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0

FAX Print Count : 0

Call Counter Pre-Set Value : 14000

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | | | |

| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

SC : SPC :

192APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)5.2.8.1. OverviewThis Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.

Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "9: System Maintenance" on the display.↓

Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.↓

Select the desired Fax number.↓

Press "START" to send the Fax. After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.

Note:If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description01 Send RCV'D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine

during a fatal printer error.

193APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6 System Description6.1. Scanning / Transmit MechanismThe transmit mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send signals. These components and their functions are as follows:

6.1.1. ADF MechanismThe ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF roller and separation rubber. The document is placed face up on the Document Tray before being fed into the unit. The ADF Roller feeds individual pages into the scanning area.The Separation Rubber separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding.

6.1.2. Transmit Guide UnitThe transmit guide unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the Transmit Guide, Control Panel Chassis, Feed Roller, Eject Roller, and Eject Pinch Roller and Feed Pinch Roller. This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference.

6.1.3. Transmit Mechanism Drive SystemThis system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a stepper motor.The Motor, a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF roller, feed roller and eject roller, with the speed based on the density of the picture information.The Feed Roller feeds the document to the scanning point and ejects the document out of the machine.

6.1.4. Verification Stamp UnitThe verification stamp unit stamps the "X" mark on the face of the document after the document is successfully transmitted or stored.

6.1.5. Scanner BlockThe scanner block consists of four mirrors, a Lens and a CCD PC Board.

194APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The mirrors, Mirror 1 and Mirror 2, reflect image information in the form of light through the Lens.The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC board, converts the image information into the electronic signals.

6.1.6. Drive System

6.2. Control PanelThe Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board and LCD Unit, which displays the various statusmessages, and a hard key-type panel.

195APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3. Printer / Receive Mechanism6.3.1. Component Layout and Paper Path

196APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3.2. Print Process

6.3.2.1. ChargeThe charge corona applies a high, uniform positive charge to the surface of the organic photoconductor (OPC) drum. The charge level is approximately 900 VDC and remains because the OPC drum has a high electrical resistance when concealed in darkness.

6.3.2.2. ExposureThe laser beam passes through the collimator lens, is reflected by the polygon mirror, and is focused onto the drum after passing through an image-forming ( ) lens and a reflection mirror. Wherever the laser beam strikes the drum, the positive charge dissipates. A latent electrical image of two different voltages potentials, which corresponds to the original page, is formed on the OPC drum.

6.3.2.3. Development / CleaningDevelopment:Non-magnetic toner is supplied to the conductive roller by the toner supply roller. The toner on the conductive roller is positively charged by friction with the toner supply roller, and the doctor blade ensures a thin layer on the surface of the conductive roller. Wherever the conductive roller touches the drum, the positively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, and the latent image is converted to a visible toner image. A bias voltage of approx. 350 VDC is applied to the conductive roller to achieve maximum print quality.

197APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Cleaning:After transfer, residual toner remains on the drum surface, and for next printing, the residual toner reaches to the development area via charge and exposure. The charge level of the OPC corresponds to the white background is +900VDC, and the bias voltage of the conductive roller is approx. +350VDC. Therefor the positively charged residual toner on the OPC drum is attracted and collected to the conductive roller. The charge level of OPC after exposure is +100VDC. So, the printing area of the OPC is cleaned.

6.3.2.4. TransferAs the paper is fed between the drum and the transfer roller, a high negative charge is applied to the back of the paper. The positive toner particles are then attracted from the drum surface to the paper. After transfer, the paper is separated from the drum surface by the curvature of the drum.

6.3.2.5. FusingThe paper passes through the fuser rollers and is subjected to heat and pressure. The fusing temperature is approximately 190°C (374°F), and the pressure is approximately 0.36kg/cm (3.53N/cm). This bonds, or fuses, the toner into the paper.

6.3.3. Paper FeedMedia TrayThe main motor drives the pick up roller after the pick up solenoid is energized, which engages the pick up roller clutch and feeds a sheet of paper. The paper is pushed to the paper feed roller, which overdrives the paper slightly causing a buckle to ensure the paper is aligned with the stationary registration roller.While triggering the registration sensor notifying the CPU paper is ready to feed. The paper at this point is at the same position as with manual feed.

Manual Feed when paper is inserted, it activates the registration sensor. At the predetermined period of time, the CPU energizes the registration solenoid that allows the registration roller to rotate, feeding paper to the Paper Path Sensor.

198APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3.4. Laser Scan Unit (Exposure)6.3.4.1. Operation TheoryThe light beam from the laser diode (light source) is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then sent to the rotating polygon mirror (polygon scanner), where it is reflected through the lens and then focused onto the OPC drum surface. The diameter of the beam is about 80 µm, and the light moves across the surface of the OPC drum in the scanning direction of right to left. As the drum rotates (sub-scans), a static image is formed where the laser beam touches the drum surface.

The laser beam is also deflected to the timing sensor. This sensor controls the start timing of scanning on the drum, providing a consistent left margin. The CPU uses the timing sensor to detect abnormal signals.

6.3.4.2. Laser BeamThe laser beam is pulsed on and off by the digital signal (nVIDEO) to form a latent image of two different voltage potentials on the drum, as shown below.

Laser Diode Specification

Item Minimum Standard MaximumOscillation Wavelength 770 785 800 nm

Output Light Power(OPC Drum Surface)

0.315 0.350 0.385 mW

199APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3.4.3. Collimator LensThe collimator lens converts light from the laser diode to parallel light. This aids in scanning and provides better convergence to a dot.

6.3.4.4. Polygon ScannerThe polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror directly driven by a brushless DC motor at a rate 20,078.74 rpm. The laser beam is reflected across the OPC drum by the mirror faces and produces the scan. One mirror face is equal to one main scan. This unit features stable line scanning speed, precision mirror surface reflection angle, reflect-free surfaces, and instant start.

Polygon Scanner Specifications

6.3.4.5. Cylindrical Lens and LensEach of the polygon mirror surfaces has a slight imperfection. This prevents the beam from scanning the OPC drum surface at the constant interval in the sub-scan direction. The cylindrical lens and lens are used for correcting this uneven laser scanning.

6.3.4.6. LensThis lens ensures that the beam scans across the surface of the OPC drum at a constant rate. The beam is refracted to parallel light as it passes through the lens to ensure that the dots at the edge of the drum and at the center of the drum are equally spaced. This lens also provides a set focal length for laser beam.

Specifications

6.3.4.7. Timing SensorThis sensor detects the laser beam and determines the start timing for scanning. A pin photodiode is used as the timing sensor.

Item SpecificationMirror 6 faces

Revolution 20,078.74 rpm

Item SpecificationScanning Width 207.43 mm

Focusing Light Spot Size 80 x 90 µm

200APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3.5. Fuser UnitA 600W heat lamp (halogen lamp) heats the surface of the teflon-coated heat roller to approximately 190°C (374°F), a thermistor monitors the heat roller temperature, and the CPU controls the ON/OFF timing of the lamp.

The thermostat is mounted 2.5mm away from the heat roller. If the ambient temperature reaches 190°C (374°F), the thermostat is opened, and power is removed from the heat lamp. The surface of the thermostat is not as hot as that of the heat roller. When the thermostat opens, the surface of the heat roller may reach 210°C (410°F), and the system displays E4-01. If the thermistor opens, the system displays E4-01. If by chance the thermostat malfunctions a thermal fuse opens.The pressure roller is kept in contact with the heat roller through 2 pressure springs, which apply a pressure of approximately 0.36 kg/cm (3.56 N/cm). Drive is supplied from the main motor via intermediate gears.

201APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.3.6. Paper Ejection and Paper SwitchbackA. Normal Printing Mode (Not Duplex Mode)After fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined period of time, “Jam at A” is displayed, and if paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period, “Jam at B” is displayed on the computer screen. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.

B. Duplex ModeAfter fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined period of time, “Jam at A” is displayed on the computer screen. At the specified time after the sensor detects the bottom of paper, the Exit Roller rotates in reverse direction, turning ON the Exit solenoid to move the ratchet lever to Duplex Position. As a result, the paper is fed to the development area through the Auto Duplex Unit (ADU). If paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period, “Jam at E” is displayed. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.

202APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4. Signal Waveform6.4.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Glossary of Electrical AbbreviationsSignal Name Function

+12V +12 VDC Power Supply+24V +24 VDC Power Supply+24VIR +24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW+3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply+5V +5 VDC Power Supply+5V(LD) +5 VDC through Process Interlock SW+5VB +5 VDC Power Supply+5VP +5 VDC Power Supply+5VSP +5 VDC Energy Saver Control+ACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply+ALM ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply+DAT DATA Lamp LED Power Supply+SLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply24VGND Ground5VGND GroundA 2nd Feeder Motor Control SignalADCLK A/D Sample Clock Input for 3-Channels ModeADF_CLUCH-2 ADF Clutch Control SignalADF_COVER-2 ADF Cover Open Detection SignalADF_MOTER_MODE-2 ADF Motor Mode Control SignalADF_ON_LINE ADF Detection SignalADF_PAPER-S1-2 ADF Paper Detection Sensor SignalADF_PAPER-S2-2 ADF Registration Sensor SignalADF_PAPER-S3-2 ADF Sensor SignalADF_STAMP-2 ADF STAMP Control SignalADFPH0-1 ADF Motor Control SignalADFPH1-1 ADF Motor Control SignalADFPH2-1 ADF Motor Control SignalADFPH3-1 ADF Motor Control SignalAFE-SCK Clock Input for Serial InterfaceAFE-SDI Serial Data Input/OutputAFE-SEN Serial Interface Load PulseATA0 HDD Address SignalATA1 HDD Address SignalATA2 HDD Address SignalATAINT HDD Interruption SignalATCS0 Master HDD Select SignalATCS1 Slave HDD Select SignalATD0 HDD Data SignalATD1 HDD Data SignalATD10 HDD Data SignalATD11 HDD Data Signal

203APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
ATD12 HDD Data SignalATD13 HDD Data SignalATD14 HDD Data SignalATD15 HDD Data SignalATD2 HDD Data SignalATD3 HDD Data SignalATD4 HDD Data SignalATD5 HDD Data SignalATD6 HDD Data SignalATD7 HDD Data SignalATD8 HDD Data SignalATD9 HDD Data SignalATIORD HDD Data Read SignalATIORDY HDD Read / Write Ready SignalATIOWR HDD Data Write SignalATRST HDD Reset SignalB 2nd Feeder Motor Control SignalBAT+ Lithium BatteryBZCLK Buzzer Signal OutputC1- Capacitor 1 Negative Connection Pin for ConverterC1+ Capacitor 1 Positive Connection Pin for ConverterC2- Capacitor 2 Negative Connection Pin for ConverterC2+ Capacitor 2 Positive Connection Pin for ConverterC3+ Capacitor 3 Positive Connection Pin for ConverterC4+ Capacitor 4 Positive Connection Pin for ConverterCCD-CK1 Image Data Transmission ClockCCD-CK2 Image Data Transmission ClockCCD-CP Clamp Gate SignalCCD-RS Reset Gate SignalCCD-TG Shift Gate SignalCCLK Serial I/F ClockCDSCLK1 CDS Reference Clock SignalCDSCLK2 CDS Data Clock SignalCLOCK_OP CLOCKCSB1 Chip Select SignalCXD Serial Data CommandD- USB Data SignalD+ USB Data SignalDASP HDD Active SignalDB0 Data SignalDB1 Data SignalDB2 Data SignalDB3 Data SignalDB4 Data SignalDB5 Data SignalDB6 Data Signal


204APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
DB7 Data SignalE_RDB Read/Write Execution Control SignalEBC3A[20] System Address BusEBC3A[21] System Address BusEBC3A[22] System Address BusEBC3A[23] System Address BusEBC3A[24] System Address BusEBC3A[25] System Address BusEBC3A[26] System Address BusEBC3A[27] System Address BusEBC3A[28] System Address BusEBC3A[29] System Address BusEBC3A[30] System Address BusEBC3A[31] System Address BusEBC3D[0] System Data BusEBC3D[1] System Data BusEBC3D[2] System Data BusEBC3D[3] System Data BusEBC3D[4] System Data BusEBC3D[5] System Data BusEBC3D[6] System Data BusEBC3D[7] System Data BusEXITSOL_CTL Exit Solenoid ControlFANNERR Fan Error Detection SignalFANPWR +24 VDC Fan PowerGLA LED Control SignalGLK(GND) GroundGND GroundHOME Home Position Detection SignalHPMB LCD Driver Power Control SignalINV-SW-1 Inverter Control SignalIO16 16-bit Transmission Control SignalKCCNT Mechanical Counter Detect SignalKIN0 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN1 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN2 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN3 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN4 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN5 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN6 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)KIN7 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)LED0 PNL LED Control SignalLED1 PNL LED Control SignalLED2 PNL LED Control SignalLED3 PNL LED Control SignalLED4 PNL LED Control Signal


205APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
LED5 PNL LED Control SignalLED6 PNL LED Control SignalLED7 PNL LED Control SignalLED8 PNL LED Control SignalLED9 PNL LED Control SignalLEDCT0 PNL LED Control SignalLEDCT1 PNL LED Control SignalLEDCT2 PNL LED Control SignalLEDCT3 PNL LED Control SignalLEDCT4 PNL LED Control SignalMODE-SW Scan Mode Select SignalN.C. No Connectionn5VMTON Monitor ON / OFF Select SignalNA 2nd Feeder Motor Control SignalnADUST LSU APC TimingnAPNT ADF Paper Detection Sensor SignalNB 2nd Feeder Motor Control SignalnBECOE Read Control SignalnBOOK ADF Open / Close Detection SignalNCBSY Busy CommandnCHGCTL HVPS Charge Control (ON/OFF)nCSMON Modem Chip Select SignalnDB Developer (+ Voltage PWM Pulse)nDBCH Developer Charge (+/- Change)nEBCWBE[0] Write Control SignalnEXITSEN EXIT Sensor SignalnFCTL Fuser ON/OFF ControlnFXBSET FXB Detection SignalnFXBWUP Wake Up SignalnHKOF5V Off-Hook Detection SignalnHSYNC Horizontal Sync SignalnLDON LD Light EnablenLEDACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Control SignalnLEDALM ALARM Lamp LED Control SignalnLEDAT DATA Lamp LED Control SignalnLEDSLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Control SignalnLPOW1 +5 VDC Power Supply Return SignalnMDMINT Modem Interruption SignalnMDMRST Modem Reset SignalnMMCTL Main Motor Control SignalnMMHALF Motor Rotation Speed ControlnMMLD Main Motor Rotation SignalnMOEN_OP 2nd Feeder Motor Control SignalnMPOW1 Power Supply Control SignalnMVOL0 Monitor Volume Control SignalnMVOL1 Monitor Volume Control Signal


206APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
nMVOL2 Monitor Volume Control SignalnOPTION 2nd Feeder Option Detection SignalnPON_OP 2nd Feeder No Paper Detection SignalNPRDY Printer ReadyNPRINT Print StartnPUCTL_OP 2nd Feeder Paper Pick up ControlNPURGE Paper End Detection SignalnREGSEN REGISTRATION Sensor SignalNRES Printer ResetNSBSY Busy StatusnSCNDOR ADF Open / Close Detection SignalnSCNRST Scanner Reset SignalnSLPKY Energy Saver Key SignalnSNRCLK LSU Motor ClocknSNRCTL LSU Motor Control SignalnSNRLD LSU Motor Lock SignalnTESEN Low Toner Sensor SignalNTOP Paper Top Detection SignalnTOPSEN Paper Detect Sensor SignalnTR Transfer (- Voltage PWM Pulse)nTRCTL HVPS Transfer Control (+/- Change)NVIDEO Video DatanVIDEO Video SignalnWAKEUP Wake Up SignalOUT1 Motor Drive SignalOUT2 Motor Drive SignalOUT3 Motor Drive SignalOUT4 Motor Drive SignalpCMLD CML ON / OFF Select SignalPNLRXD PNL Reception Data SignalPNLTXD PNL Transmission Data SignalPNON No Paper Sensor SignalpPNLRST PNL Reset SignalPS Parallel / Serial Data Input Select SignalPSAVE Power Save Control SignalPUSOL_CTL Pick Up Solenoid ControlPUSOL_CTL1 Pick Up Solenoid ControlREGSOL_CTL Registration Solenoid ControlRESETB LCD Driver Reset SignalRS Register Selection Control SignalRW_WRD Read/Write Execution Control SignalRXD- LAN Receiving DataRXD+ LAN Receiving DataSCN[0] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[1] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[10] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)


207APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
SCN[11] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[2] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[3] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[4] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[5] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[6] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[7] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[8] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SCN[9] PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)SXD Serial Data StatusTH Fuser Thermistor SignalTXD- LAN Transmission DataTXD+ LAN Transmission DataV0 LCD Driver Supply VoltagesV1 LCD Driver Supply VoltagesV2 LCD Driver Supply VoltagesV3 LCD Driver Supply VoltagesV4 LCD Driver Supply VoltagesVBUS +5 VDC Power SupplyVc1 LCD Driver Reference VoltageVCC +5 VDC Power SupplyVCDS Density Sensor ONVCNT Inverter Control SignalVDD +3.3 VDC Power SupplyVINA Sensor Input SignalVINX Sensor Input SignalVOUT Voltage Converter Input / OutputVOUTA Sensor Control SignalVOUTB Sensor Control SignalVOUTX Sensor Control SignalVSS GroundVTED Toner Detect Sensor ONWEBSOL Web Solenoid Control SignalX1 Touch Panel Matrix SignalX2 Touch Panel Matrix SignalY1 Touch Panel Matrix SignalY2 Touch Panel Matrix SignalYLA LED Control SignalYLK(GND) GroundZCIN Zero Crossing Signal


208APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.2. SC PC Board

CN300

SC PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN300-1 +24V LVPSCN101-1

+24 VDC Power Supply

CN300-2 +24V LVPSCN101-2


CN300-3 +24V LVPSCN101-3


CN300-4 GND LVPSCN101-4

Ground


Ground

CN300-6 +5V LVPSCN101-6

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN300-7 +5V LVPSCN101-7

+5 VDC Power Supply


Ground

CN300-9 +3.3V LVPSCN101-9

+3.3 VDC Power Supply

CN300-10 +3.3V LVPSCN101-10


+24V Sleep Mode

+24V Shutdown Mode 0V

+24V Sleep Mode


+24V Sleep Mode


0V

0V

+5V Sleep Mode


+5V Sleep Mode


0V

+3.3V Sleep Mode

+3.3V Shutdown Mode 0V

+3.3V Sleep Mode


209APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN301


Ground

CN300-12 +5VP LVPSCN101-12

+5 VDC Power Supply


Ground

CN300-14 nMPOW1 LVPSCN101-14

Power Supply Control Signal

CN300-15 nFCTL LVPSCN101-15

Fuser ON/OFF Control

CN300-16 N.C. LVPSCN101-16

No Connection


CN301-1 nFCTL Engine Control PCBCN005-1

Fuser ON/OFF Control

CN301-2 5VGND Engine Control PCBCN005-2

Ground

CN301-3 +5V Engine Control PCBCN005-3

+5 VDC Power Supply


Ground


Ground


0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

PowerSaving

+5V

0V

HeaterON

+5V

0V

HeaterON

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

0V

210APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN302

CN304






CN302-1 +24V Mechanical Counter


CN302-2 KCCNT Mechanical Counter

Mechanical Counter Detect Signal


CN304-1 +24V SPC PCBP102-1


CN304-2 +24V SPC PCBP102-2


CN304-3 GND SPC PCBP102-3

Ground


Ground

CN304-5 +12V SPC PCBP102-5



Ground


+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+24V Sleep Mode


+3.3V

0V

Counter Mount

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

0V

+12V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

211APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN305

CN306

CN304-7 +5V SPC PCBP102-7

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN304-8 +5VP SPC PCBP102-8

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN304-9 nBOOK SPC PCBP102-9

ADF Open / Close Detection Signal

CN304-10 nAPNT SPC PCBP102-10

ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal

CN304-11 nSCNRST SPC PCBP102-11

Scanner Reset Signal


CN305-1 VBUS SPC PCBP101-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN305-2 D- SPC PCBP101-2

USB D-

CN305-3 D+ SPC PCBP101-3

USB D+


Ground


CN306-1 +24V PNL1 PCBCN220-1



+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5VSleep &Shudown

+3.3V

0V

ADF Closed

+5V Doc. ON

+5V

0V Reset

+5V

0V Ping

3.3V

0V 0.4V

3.3V

0V 0.4V

0V

+24V Sleep Mode


212APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN306-2 GND PNL1 PCBCN220-2

Ground


Ground


Ground

CN306-5 +5VP PNL1 PCBCN220-5

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN306-6 +5V PNL1 PCBCN220-6

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN306-7 PNLRXD PNL1 PCBCN220-7

PNL Reception Data Signal

CN306-8 PNLTXD PNL1 PCBCN220-8

PNL Transmission Data Signal

CN306-9 pPNLRST PNL1 PCBCN220-9

PNL Reset Signal

CN306-10 BZCLK PNL1 PCBCN220-10

Buzzer Signal Output

CN306-11 nLPOW1 PNL1 PCBCN220-11

+5 VDC Power Supply Return Signal

CN306-12 nSLPKY PNL1 PCBCN220-12

Energy Saver Key Signal


0V

0V

0V

+5V

+5V Sleep Mode


+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V RESET

+3.3V

0V

+5V

0V

+3.3V

0V PRESSED

213APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN308

CN306-13 nWAKEUP PNL1 PCBCN220-13

Wake Up Signal


Ground


Ground

CN306-16 nBOOK PNL1 PCBCN220-16



CN308-1 NTOP Engine Control PCBCN001-24

Paper Top Detection Signal

CN308-2 ZCIN Engine Control PCBCN001-23

Zero Crossing Signal

CN308-3 NSBSY Engine Control PCBCN001-22

Busy Status

CN308-4 GND Engine Control PCBCN001-21

Ground

CN308-5 NVIDEO Engine Control PCBCN001-20

Video Data


Ground

CN308-7 NHSYNC Engine Control PCBCN001-18

Horizontal Synchronization


+5V

0V Wake UP

Energy Saving

0V

0V

+3.3V

0V

ADF Closed

+5V

0V

Paper TopDetection

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

214APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN308-8 NRES Engine Control PCBCN001-17

Printer Reset

CN308-9 NPURGE Engine Control PCBCN001-16

Paper End Detection Signal


Ground

CN308-11 CXD Engine Control PCBCN001-14

Serial Data Command


Ground

CN308-13 CCLK Engine Control PCBCN001-12

Serial I/F Clock


Ground

CN308-15 SXD Engine Control PCBCN001-10

Serial Data Status


Ground

CN308-17 NPRINT Engine Control PCBCN001-8

Print Start

CN308-18 N.C. Engine Control PCBCN001-7

No Connection

CN308-19 NCBSY Engine Control PCBCN001-6

Busy Command


+5V

0V Reset

+5V

0V

Paper EndDetection

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

PrintStart

+5V

0V Command

215APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN309


No Connection

CN308-21 NPRDY Engine Control PCBCN001-4

Printer Ready


No Connection

CN308-23 ZCIN Engine Control PCBCN001-2

No Connection

CN308-24 PSAVE Engine Control PCBCN001-1

Power Save Control Signal


CN309-1 ATRST HDD I/F HDD Reset Signal

CN309-2 GND HDD I/F Ground

CN309-3 ATD7 HDD I/F HDD Data Signal





+5V

0V

Printer Ready

+5V

0V Energy Save

+5V

0V RESET

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

216APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190












+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

217APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190


CN309-20 N.C. HDD I/F No Connection



CN309-23 ATIOWR HDD I/F HDD Data Write Signal


CN309-25 ATIORD HDD I/F HDD Data Read Signal


CN309-27 ATIORDY HDD I/F HDD Read / Write Ready Signal




+5V

0V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

218APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190

CN309-31 ATAINT HDD I/F HDD Interruption Signal

CN309-32 IO16 HDD I/F 16-bit Transmission Control Signal

CN309-33 ATA1 HDD I/F HDD Address Signal




CN309-37 ATCS1 HDD I/F Slave HDD Select Signal

CN309-38 ATCS0 HDD I/F Master HDD Select Signal

CN309-39 DASP HDD I/F HDD Active Signal



0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

219APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN330


CN330-1 +24V FXB PCBCN110-1


CN330-2 +5VP FXB PCBCN110-2

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN330-3 GND FXB PCBCN110-3

Ground

CN330-4 GND FXB PCBCN110-4

Ground

CN330-5 EBC3D[0] FXB PCBCN110-5

System Data Bus


System Data Bus


System Data Bus


System Data Bus


System Data Bus


System Data Bus


System Data Bus

+24V

+5V

0V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

220APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190

System Data Bus

CN330-13 EBC3A[20] FXB PCBCN110-13

System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


System Address Bus


+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

221APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190

System Address Bus


System Address Bus

CN330-25 nFXBSET FXB PCBCN110-25

FXB Detection Signal

CN330-26 nFXBWUP FXB PCBCN110-26

Wake Up Signal

CN330-27 BZCLK FXB PCBCN110-27

Buzzer Signal Output

CN330-28 nEBCWBE[0] FXB PCBCN110-28

Write Control Signal

CN330-29 nEBCOE FXB PCBCN110-29

Output Enable

CN330-30 nMDMINT FXB PCBCN110-30

Modem Interruption Signal

CN330-31 nCSMON FXB PCBCN110-31

Modem Chip Select Signal

CN330-32 nMDMRST FXB PCBCN110-32

Modem Reset Signal

CN330-33 n5VMTON FXB PCBCN110-33

Monitor ON / OFF Select Signal


+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

FXBDetection

+3.3V

0V

WakeUp

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+5V

0V

222APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN330-34 nMVOL0 FXB PCBCN110-34

Monitor Volume Control Signal





CN330-37 nHKOF5V FXB PCBCN110-37

Off-Hook Detection Signal

CN330-38 pCMLD FXB PCBCN110-38

CML ON / OFF Select SignalH : CML OnL : CML Off

CN330-39 +5VB FXB PCBCN110-39

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN330-40 +3.3V FXB PCBCN110-40



+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V(H)

0V(L)OFF

ON

+5V Sleep Mode


+3.3V Sleep Mode


223APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.3. SPC PC BoardP101Refer to SC PC Board CN305.

P102Refer to SC PC Board CN304.

P103

SPC PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

P103-1 GND CCD PCBP603-1

Ground


Ground

P103-3 +24V CCD PCBP603-3

+24 VDC Power Supply (CCD)

P103-4 +24V CCD PCBP603-4

+24 VDC Power Supply (CCD)

P103-5 +12V CCD PCBP603-5

+12 VDC Power Supply (Inverter)

P103-6 +12V CCD PCBP603-6

+12 VDC Power Supply (Inverter)

P103-7 VCC CCD PCBP603-7

+5 VDC Power Supply

P103-8 INV-SW-1 CCD PCBP603-8

Inverter Control Signal

P103-9 CDSCLK2 CCD PCBP603-1

CDS Data Clock Signal

P103-10 CCD-TG CCD PCBP603-2

Shift Gate Signal

0V

0V

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+12V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+12V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+3.3V

0V

15ns

+3.3V

0V

15ns

224APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190

Ground

P103-12 MGND CCD PCBP603-4

Ground

P103-13 CDSCLK1 CCD PCBP603-5

CDS Reference Clock Signal

P103-14 CCD-CP CCD PCBP603-5

Clamp Gate Signal

P103-15 AFE-SEN CCD PCBP603-5

Serial Interface Load Pulse

P103-16 CCD-CK2 CCD PCBP603-5

Image Data Transmission Clock


Ground

P103-18 CCD-CK1 CCD PCBP603-5

Image Data Transmission Clock

P103-19 AFE-SEN CCD PCBP603-5

Serial Interface Load Pulse

P103-20 ADCLK CCD PCBP603-5

A/D Sample Clock Input for 3-Channels Mode


Ground

P103-22 AFE-SCK CCD PCBP603-5

Serial Interface Clock Input


0V

0V

+3.3V

0V

15ns

+3.3V

0V

15ns

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

60ns 60ns

0V

+3.3V

0V

60ns 60ns

+3.3V

0V

EnableSetting

+3.3V

0V

30ns

0V

+3.3V

0V

225APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
P104

P103-23 DB7 CCD PCBP603-5

Data Signal

P103-24 MODE-SW CCD PCBP603-5

Scan Mode Select Signal


Data Signal


Data Signal


Ground


Data Signal


Data Signal

P103-30 DB2 CCD PCBCN3-5

Data Signal


Data Signal


Data Signal


P104-1 +24V ADF PCBPA04-1



+3.3V

0V

+5V

0V ColorB/W

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

226APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
P104-2 ADF_PAPER-S2--2

ADF PCBPA04-2

ADF Registration Sensor Signal

P104-3 +24V ADF PCBPA04-3


P104-4 ADF_CLUCH-2

ADF PCBPA04-4

ADF Clutch Control Signal

P104-5 VCC ADF PCBPA04-7

+5 VDC Power Supply

P104-6 ADF_MOTER_MODE-2

ADF PCBPA04-8

ADF Motor Mode Control Signal

P104-7 GND ADF PCBPA04-9

Ground

P104-8 ADFPH0-1 ADF PCBPA04-10

ADF Motor Control Signal

P104-9 GND ADF PCBPA04-1

Ground



P104-11 ADF_PAPER-S3--2

ADF PCBPA04-1

ADF Sensor Signal



P104-13 ADF_COVER-2

ADF PCBPA04-1

ADF Cover Open Detection Signal


+5V

0V

Document at Regist 1

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V Clutch ON

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V

Hight Current

Low Current

0V

+5V 1.2ms

2.0ms 0V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

Document at Regist 2

+5V

0V

+3.3V

0V

ADF CoverClose

227APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
P105

P106



P104-15 ADF_PAPER-S1-2

ADF PCBPA04-1

ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal

P104-16 ADF_ON_LINE

ADF PCBPA04-1

ADF Detection Signal

P104-17 ADF_STAMP-2

ADF PCBPA04-1

ADF STAMP Control Signal

P104-18 +5VP ADF PCBPA04-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

SPC PCBPin No.

Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

P105-1 OUT1 Scanner Motor-1 Motor Drive Signal





P106-1 VCC Home Detect Sensor-1

+5 VDC Power Supply


+5V

0V

+5V

0V

Doc. Detected

+5V

0V Stamp ON

+5VEnergySaver

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

228APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
P106-2 GND Home Detect Sensor-2

Ground

P106-3 GND Home Detect Sensor-3

Ground

P106-4 HOME Home Detect Sensor-4

Home Position Detection Signal


0V

0V

+5V

0V

Scanner at Home Position

229APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.4. Engine Control PC BoardCN001Refer to SC PC Board CN308.

CN002

CN003

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN002-1 nADJUST LSU PCBLaser Diode-1

LSU APC timing

CN002-2 nVIDEO LSU PCBLaser Diode-2

Video Signal

CN002-3 nLDON LSU PCBLaser Diode-3

LD Light Enable

CN002-4 5VGND LSU PCBLaser Diode-4

Ground

CN002-5 5V(LD) LSU PCBLaser Diode-5

+5 VDC through Process Interlock SW

CN002-6 5VGND LSU PCBLaser Diode-6

Ground

CN002-7 nHSYNC LSU PCBLaser Diode-7

Horizontal Sync Signal

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN003-1 +5V Process Interlock SW-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN003-2 N.C. Process Interlock SW-2

No Connection

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

230APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN004

CN003-3 +5V(LD) Process Interlock SW-3

+5 VDC through Process Interlock SW

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN004-1 24VGND 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-1

Ground

CN004-2 nMOEN_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal

CN004-3 CLOCK_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

CLOCK

CN004-4 +24V 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2


CN004-5 nPUCTL_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control

CN004-6 nOPTION 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal

CN004-7 +5V 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN004-8 nPON_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

2nd Feeder No Paper Detection Signal

CN004-9 5VGND 2nd Paper Feed Module PCBCN452-2

Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


+5V

0V

+5V

0V

2nd FeederMotor Enable

+5V

0V

+24V

2nd FeederPick up Enable

+5V

0V

+5V

0V 2nd FeederDetection

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

2nd FeederNo PaperDetection

+5V

0V

0V

231APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN005Refer to SC PC Board CN301.

CN006

CN007

CN008

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN006-1 +24V Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-3


CN006-2 24VGND Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-5

Ground

CN006-3 +24VIR Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-1

+24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN007-1 +5V Thermistor-2 +5 VDC Power Supply

CN007-2 TH Thermistor-1 Fuser Thermistor Signal

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN008-1 +24VIR HVPS PCBCN501-10

+24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW

CN008-2 24VGND HVPS PCBCN501-9

Ground


Ground

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

+24V

+5V

Cover OpenSleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

5V

0V

+24V

+5V


0V

0V

232APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN009

CN008-4 nCHGCTL HVPS PCBCN501-7

HVPS Charge Control (ON/OFF)

CN008-5 nDBCH HVPS PCBCN501-6

Developer Charge (+/- Change)

CN008-6 nDB HVPS PCBCN501-5

Developer (+ Voltage PWM Pulse)

CN008-7 nTRCTL HVPS PCBCN501-4

HVPS Transfer Control (+/- Change)

CN008-8 nTR HVPS PCBCN501-3

Transfer (- Voltage PWM Pulse)

CN008-9 +5V HVPS PCBCN501-2

+5 VDC Power Supply


Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN009-1 nTESEN Low Toner SensorCN451-1

Low Toner Sensor Signal

CN009-2 5VGND Low Toner SensorCN451-2

Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


HVPSCharge Enable

+5V

0V

Developer Charge (+/-) Enable

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

HVPS Transfer Enable

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

Low TonerDetection

+5V

0V

0V

233APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN010

CN011

CN012

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN010-1 nSNRCLK LSU Motor-1 LSU Motor Clock

CN010-2 nSNRLD LSU Motor-2 LSU Motor Lock Signal

CN010-3 nSNRCTL LSU Motor-3 LSU Motor Control Signal

CN010-4 24VGND LSU Motor-4 Ground

CN010-5 +24V LSU Motor-5 +24 VDC Power Supply

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN011-1 PUSOL_CTL Pick Up Solenoid-1

Pick Up Solenoid Control

CN011-2 24VGND Pick Up Solenoid-2

Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN012-1 REGSOL_CTL

RegistrationSolenoid-1

Registration Solenoid Control

+5V

0V

LSU MotorLockDetection

+5V

0V

LSU Motor ControlEnable

+5V

0V

0V

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

Pick UpSolenoidON

+24V

0V

0V

RegistrationSolenoidON

+24V

0V

234APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN013

CN014

CN012-2 24VGND RegistrationSolenoid-2

Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN013-1 EXITSOL_CTL

Exit Solenoid-1 Exit Solenoid Control

CN013-2 24VGND Exit Solenoid-2 Ground

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN014-1 +5V Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN014-2 5VGND Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401-2

Ground

CN014-3 5VGND Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401-3

Ground

CN014-4 nREGSEN Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401-4

Registration Sensor Signal

CN014-5 nTOPSEN Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401-5

Paper Detect Sensor Signal

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


0V

ExitSolenoidON

+24V

0V

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

0V

0V

RegistrationSensor ON

+5V

0V

Paper DetectSensor ON

+5V

0V

235APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN015

CN016

CN017

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN015-1 +5VSP Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC BoardCN402-1

+5 VDC Energy Saver Control

CN015-2 5VGND Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC BoardCN402-2

Ground

CN015-3 5VGND Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC BoardCN402-3

Ground

CN015-4 nEXITSEN Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC BoardCN402-4

EXIT Sensor Signal

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN016-1 5VGND No Paper SensorCN450-1

Ground

CN016-2 PNON No Paper SensorCN450-2

No Paper Sensor Signal

CN016-3 +5VSP No Paper SensorCN450-3

+5 VDC Energy Saver Control

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN017-1 +24VIR Main Motor-1 +24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW

+5V

0V

0V

Exit Sensor ON

+5V

0V

0V

No PaperSensor ON

+5V

0V

+5V

+24V

+5V


236APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN018

CN017-2 +24VIR Main Motor-2 +24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW

CN017-3 24VGND Main Motor-3 Ground

CN017-4 24VGND Main Motor-4 Ground

CN017-5 nMMCTL Main Motor-5 Main Motor Control Signal

CN017-6 nMMLD Main Motor-6 Main Motor Rotation Signal

CN017-7 nMMHALF Main Motor-7 Motor Rotation Speed ControlH: 1908.35 rpmL: 954.18 rpm

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


CN018-1 FANPER Fan Motor-1 +24VDC Fan Power

CN018-2 24VGND Fan Motor-2 Ground

CN018-3 FANNERR Fan Motor-3 Fan Error Detection Signal

Engine Control

PCB Pin No.


+24V

+5V


0V

0V

Main Motor ControlEnable

+5V

0V

Main Motor Rotation Enable

+5V

0V

+5V (H)

0V (L)

+24V

0V

+5V

0V

237APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.5. PNL1 PC BoardCN220Refer to SC PC Board CN306.

CN230

PNL1 PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN230-1 LED0 PNL5 PCBCN261-4

PNL LED Control Signal


Ground



CN230-4 KIN6 PNL5 PCBCN264-7

PNL Key Signal (Key Line)



CN230-6 SCN[0] PNL5 PCBCN264-1

PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)











LED LightOPEN

0V

0V

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

LED LightOPEN

0V

238APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN231



CN230-13 LEDCT2 PNL5 PCBCN261-1










CN230-18 BAT+ PNL5 PCBCN261-10

Lithium Battery


CN231-1 +SLP PNL2 PCBCN256-1

Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply

CN231-2 nLEDSLP PNL2 PCBCN256-2

Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal

CN231-3 nSLPKY PNL2 PCBCN256-3

Energy Saver Key Signal


Ground


+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+5V

0V LED ON

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+5V

0V LED ON

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+5V

0V LED ON

+3V

+5VP

+5VP

0V

+3.3V

0V PUSH

0V

239APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN232



CN231-6 N.C. PNL2 PCBCN256-6

No Connection



CN231-8 nSCNDOR PNL2 PCBCN256-8


















+5V

0V LED ON

+5V

0V LED ON

+3.3V

0V

ADF Closed

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

240APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN233






No Connection










CN233-1 +DAT PNL2 PCBCN252-1

DATA Lamp LED Power Supply


No Connection

CN233-3 +ALM PNL2 PCBCN252-3

ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply




+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

241APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN233-5 +ACT PNL2 PCBCN252-5

ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply



CN233-7 nLEDACT PNL2 PCBCN252-7

ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal



CN233-9 nLEDALM PNL2 PCBCN252-9

ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal



CN233-11 nLEDAT PNL2 PCBCN252-11

DATA Lamp LED Control Signal












+24V

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

+5V

0V LED ON

+3.3V

0V

LED LightOPEN

0V

+5V

0V LED ON

LED LightOPEN

0V

+5V

0V LED ON

LED LightOPEN

0V

242APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN234

























+5V

0V LED ON

+5V

0V LED ON

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

243APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN234-10 SCN[10] PNL2 PCBCN255-10







No Connection


Ground


+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

+3.3V

0V

KeyScan

0V

244APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.6. PNL2 PC Board

CN251

CN252Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN233.



CN257













CN257-1 nBOOK Scanner Door Sensor


CN257-2 GND Scanner Door Sensor

Ground

+5V

0V LED ON

LED LightOPEN

0V

LED LightOPEN

0V

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

KeyPressed

+3.3V

0V

ADF Closed

0V

245APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.7. PNL3 PC BoardCN262Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN232.CN263Refer to PNL2 PC Board CN251.

6.4.8. PNL5 PC BoardCN261Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN230.CN264Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN230.

246APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.9. ADF PC Board

PA01

PA02

PA03

ADF PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

PA01-1 OUT1 ADF Motor-1 Motor Drive Signal





PA02-1 ADF PAPER_S1

Paper Sensor-1 Paper Sensor Signal

PA02-2 GND Paper Sensor-2 Ground

PA02-3 GND Paper Sensor-3 Ground

PA02-4 +5VP Paper Sensor-4 +5 VDC Power Supply


PA03-1 ADFPAPER_S2

Regist Sensor-1 Paper Register Sensor Signal

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

+5V

0V

Doc. Detected

0V

0V

+5VEnergySaver

+5V

0V

Document at regist 1

247APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
PA04Refer to SPC PC Board P104.

PA05

PA08

PA03-2 GND Regist Sensor-2 Ground

PA03-3 GND Regist Sensor-3 Ground

PA03-4 VCC Regist Sensor-4 +5 VDC Power Supply


PA05-1 ADF_COVER

Cover Sensor-1 ADF Cover Detection Signal

PA05-2 GND Cover Sensor-2 Ground


PA08-1 GND STAMP Solenoid-1

Ground

PA08-2 ADF_STAMP STAMP Solenoid-2

ADF STAMP Control Signal


0V

0V

+5V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+5V

0V

CoverClose

0V

0V

+24V

0V Stamp ON

248APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.10. FXB PC BoardCN110Refer to SC PC Board CN330.

CN113

CN114

FXB PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN113-1 +5VP MJR PCBCN25-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN113-2 GND MJR PCBCN25-2

Ground

FXB PCBPin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN114-1 pSPKOT Speaker Line Signal, Dial Tone

CN114-2 GND Speaker Ground

+5V

0V

+1V

-1V(Min)

(Max)

0V

249APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.11. Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC BoardCN401Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN014.

6.4.12. Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC BoardCN402Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN015.

6.4.13. No Paper Sensor PC BoardCN450Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN016.

6.4.14. Low Toner Sensor PC BoardCN451Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN009.

250APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.15. 2nd Paper Feed Module I/F PC BoardCN452Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN004.

CN453

I/F PCB Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN453-1 5VGND 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

Ground

CN453-2 nMOEN_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1


CN453-3 nPON_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

2nd Feeder No Paper Detection Signal

CN453-4 nOPTION 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal

CN453-5 nPUCTL_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control

CN453-6 24VGND 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

Ground

CN453-7 +5V 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

+5 VDC Power Supply

CN453-8 +24V 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1


CN453-9 CLOCK_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1

CLOCK

0V

+5V

0V

2nd FeederMotor Enable

2nd FeederNo PaperDetection

+5V

0V

+5V

0V 2nd FeederDetection

2nd FeederPick up Enable

+5V

0V

0V

+5V

+24V

+5V

0V

251APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.16. HVPSCN501Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN008.

6.4.17. LVPSCN101Refer to SC PC Board CN300.

CN102

CN2

LVPS Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN102-1 GND DC PCBCN141-3

Ground

CN102-3 +24V DC PCBCN141-1


LVPS Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function

CN2-1 ACL LVPSCN2-1

AC Power Supply (Live)

CN2-3 ACN LVPSCN2-3

AC Power Supply (Neutral)

0V

+24V

AC120V(AC200-240V)

AC120V(AC200-240V)

252APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.18. DC PC BoardCN141Refer to LVPS CN102.

CN143

DC PCB Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function


CN143-13 +5VP HDD I/F +5 VDC Power Supply



0V

+5V

+5V

+5V

253APR 2006 Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.19. 2nd Feeder PC Board

CN600

CN601

CN602Refer to 2nd Feed Module I/F PC Board CN453.

2nd Feeder

PCB Pin No.


CN600-1 +24V 2nd Feeder Motor-1


CN600-2 +24V 2nd Feeder Motor-2


CN600-3 A 2nd Feeder Motor-3


CN600-4 NA 2nd Feeder Motor-4


CN600-5 B 2nd Feeder Motor-5


CN600-6 NB 2nd Feeder Motor-6


2nd Feeder

PCB Pin No.


CN601-1 PUSOL_CTL1

Pick Up Solenoid-1

Pick Up Solenoid Control

CN601-2 +24V Pick Up Solenoid-2


+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

Pick UpSolenoidON

+24V

0V

+24V

0V

Sleep &Shutdown

254APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
7 Installation7.1. Set Up Precautions

Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.

Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions. To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:

1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:

• Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.Ambient conditions Temperature: 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)

Relative humidity: 30 - 80 %• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity• Exposed to direct sunlight• Dusty environment• Poorly ventilated location• Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)• Exposed to strong vibration• Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent)

2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:UF-9000, DP-180/190: Approx. 48.5 lb (22 kg)

3. The maximum power consumption is 900 W for 120 VAC, or 1.0 kW for 220-240 VAC. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 Amps for 120 VAC, or 10 Amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)

4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)

5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.

6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.

Using the space requirements shown the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.

255APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Space Requirements

18.19 in (462 mm)

19.9

2 in

(506

mm

)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

42.3

6 in

(107

6 m

m)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

26.06 in (662 mm)

14.57 in (370 mm)

18.19 in (462 mm)

19.9

2 in

(506

mm

)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

4.33

in (1

10 m

m)

42.3

6 in

(107

6 m

m)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

30.39 in (772 mm)

14.57 in (370 mm)

Main Unit + Handset Option

Main Unit

256APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
7.2. Unpacking

Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before installation. Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.

Caution:Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 48.5 lb (22 kg). To prevent inju-ries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

Note:1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

No. Qty. Description Remarks1 1 Main Unit2 1 Rear Paper Tray Cover3 1 Drum Unit4 1 Toner Cartridge5 1 Hole Cover6 1 AC Power Cord7 1 Telephone Line Cable8 1 Operating Instructions For UF-90009 1 Quick Guide For DP-180/190

10 1 Operating Instructions CD11 1 Panasonic-DMS CD Includes Operating Instructions12 1 License Agreement13 1 Directory Holder14 1 Warranty Information Sheet15 1 Installation Instructions This document

257APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
7.3. Installation Procedure

Note:1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.2. The following machine illustrations, depict a UF-9000 with the USA standard configuration. 3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Bracket to prevent damage during transit.

Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner.4. Please make sure to read the “Important Note!” at the end of these Installation Instructions.

7.3.1. Installation Procedure

<Remove the Shipping Materials>

(1) Remove the Shipping Rubber Cushion.

(2) Turn the Shipping Bracket in either direction ofthe arrow to unlock and remove the bracket. (To facilitate removal, open the ADF and observethe position of the bracket through the PlatenGlass)

Caution:Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner.

Note:Store the Shipping Materials (Rubber Cushion and Shipping Bracket) in a safe place for future use.

258APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove the Protection Strip from the Battery.

<Installing the Toner Cartridge>

(4) Open the Front Cover.

<For USA/Canada/UK/Germany/France, and other Destinations> Skip to Step (6)The Toner Label is attached in the Factory.

<For Euro Special Destinations only, DP-180-AMR/EHR/EPR/YAR/YCR>

(5) Attach the Toner Label in the preferred language to the inside of the Cover as illustrated.

(6) Carefully remove the Protective Sheet from theDrum Unit.

Caution:Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of theOPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with barehands.The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light. Even if it is a fluorescent lamp, approx.1000 lm/m2 (1000 lx).

259APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(7) Shake the Toner Cartridge 10 to 15 times to loosen the contents.

(8) Remove the Protective Cover.

(9) Insert the side pins of the Toner Cartridge into the slots of the Drum Unit.

(10) Push down the Toner Cartridge to lock in place as illustrated.

(11) Install the Toner Cartridge into the machine.

(12) Push down to lock in place as illustrated.(13) Close the Front Cover.

260APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(14) Remove the Caution Label covering the AC Inlet on the machine.

(15) Plug the AC Power Cord.(16) Connect one end of the Line Cable (Telephone)

to the LINE Jack on the back side of the machine, and the other end to the Telephone Jack on the wall.

(17) If required, connect the LAN / USB Cable (not included).

(18) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position and confirm that the Scanner is unlocked and moves freely.

Note:Perform the following adjustments after the machine has warmed up and displays:

<For USA / Canada etc> Skip to Step (23)

<For Europe and Other Destinations only>

Note:The (**) *** in the LCD display above may differ depending on the destination.

(19) Press ”V” or “/\” arrow keys to select the desired destination.

(20) Press the "SET" key.(21) Press the "1" key for YES.

After the machine has warmed up, it displays:

(22) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF position, and back to the ON position.

READY TO COPYCOPIES:001

DP-180 (**) ***

DESTINATION CODE :PRESS \/ /\ TO SELECT

READY TO COPYCOPIES:001

261APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(23) Install the Rear Paper Tray Cover.

<Installing the Hole Cover>

(24) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position.

(25) Open the ADF and observe the position of the Hole Cover through the Platen Glass, to facilitate installation.

(26) Install the Hole Cover.(27) Turn the Hole Cover counterclockwise by

pushing from the bottom and ensure that it is positioned as illustrated.

Note:If the Hole Cover position is incorrectly positioned, the scanner will not work properly.

(28) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position, and reconfirm that the Scanner still moves freely.

(29) Load paper into the Paper Tray.Caution:

Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs and that it does not exceed the Max. Level Indicator. You can load up to 250 sheets (20 lb / 75 g/m2).

(30) Make a copy on the Platen to ensure the machine works properly.

262APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
7.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)(Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below.Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).

7.4.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1” key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “3” key twice, if “33 USER AUTH 1:COPY” displays on the LCD, this signifies that User


7.4.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1“ key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “0” key, and then press “SET” key.7. Press the “SET” key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST.8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ”******* DP-190 v4 *******”.9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example “******* DP-190 *******”), then you cannot add this

feature.

Important Note!The Default setting of Fax Parameter No. 177 “XMT FILE TYPE” for this machine is “2: PDF”, as PDF has become the industry standard for exchanging documents from computer to computer (Scan-to-Email feature).

However, this PDF format cannot be used for Internet Faxing (i.e. from an Internet Fax machine to an Internet Fax machine) as current Internet Fax Specifications do not support PDF file format. Internet Faxing requires TIFF-F file format. If your customer’s requirements are mainly Internet Faxing, please change the Fax Parameter No. 177 “XMT FILE TYPE” to “1: TIFF/JPEG”.

If your customer uses both Internet Fax and Scan-to-Email and needs to switch file formats on the fly, please explain to them how to use the Select Mode (F8-6) “XMT FILE TYPE/NAME” for individual transmissions. After the transmission is completed, the machine returns to its Default setting.

Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax/Email) included on the CD for DP-180/190 and on the printed copy for UF-9000.

263APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8 Options and Supplies8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option InstallationTo use PCL (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190) or PS (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190) option individually, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options.

Note:The 8 MB Expansion Board (DA-EM600) must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the PostScript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added.

Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read, and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option.

The firmware for SC, and SPC must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.

Firmware Version Table (Select according to machine's production date)Important NoticeThe Firmware in the tables below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above, cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations).

For all DP-180/190, and UF-9000 starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above (Navy Blue Control Panel) use the following firmware:< Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe >

New Navy Blue Color Light Blue Color

Standard FirmwareUser Auth. (SC = Type A)

PCL Firmware User Auth. (SC = Type B)

PostScript Firmware User Auth. (SC = Type D)

SCUF-9000 DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx

DP-180/190 DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xxSPC DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx ← ←Slot 1 FROM PCB Not Required Required Required

264APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
For all previous DP-180/190, and UF-9000 with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below (Light Blue Control Panel) use the following firmware:< Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe >

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

8.1.1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio".Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat[Navy Blue Control Panel]Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe


3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeMake sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

Standard Firmware(SC = Type A)

PCL Firmware(SC = Type B)

PostScript Firmware(SC = Type D)

SCUF-9000 DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx

DP-180/190 DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xxSPC DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx ← ←Slot 1 FROM PCB Not Required Required Required

265APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable.Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).

Note:1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing

the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions.

2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update.

3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the USB Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.

4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder User Authentication

Transferring Order


\ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2


\ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

\ DP-190_180_xxR_xxxxxx(Navy Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx X 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2


\ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx 1\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx 2

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

266APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
8.1.2. Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.




3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeImportant: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.

267APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable.Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).

Note:1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to

normal upon completion of the firmware update.2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination

location.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File Transferring Order


\ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.binDX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2


\ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.binDX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.binDX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2\ DP-190_180_xxR_xxxxxx(Navy Blue Control Panel)

\ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.binDP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2


\ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1\ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin

DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.binDP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.binDP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin

1-11-21-3

\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

268APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
8.1.3. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.5. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys, and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).7. The firmware is copied into the machine.8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby.9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.

10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.11. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are

other than factory default.Note:

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby mode.Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9 Parameters F9-02-xx.

Caution:If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)

8.1.3.1. Creating a Master Firmware CardA. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit




269APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware CardImportant: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys, and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).

The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC. (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)

Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.

B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys, and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys

simultaneously to return to standby.8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.

10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

8.1.3.2. Erasing the Master Firmware Card1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning


2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.4. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys, and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET

TO START”. Press “STOP”.7. Press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.

10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

270APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
8.1.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)(Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then you cannot add this feature.Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).

8.1.4.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1” key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “3” key twice, if “33 USER AUTH 1:COPY” displays on the LCD, this signifies that User


8.1.4.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List1. Press the “COPY” key to enter the Copy Function Mode.2. Press the “FUNCTION” key to enter the Function Mode.3. Press the “1“ key, and then press “SET” key to enter the General Settings Mode.4. Press the “9” key to enter the Key Operator Mode.5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press “SET” key. (Default setting “000”)6. Press the “0” key, and then press “SET” key.7. Press the “SET” key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST.8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ”******* DP-190 v4 *******”.9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example “******* DP-190 *******”), then you cannot add this

feature.

271APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190)

8.2.1. Contents

Note:1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.2.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed

into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600).

2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key PCL KEY1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions1 License Agreement For USA and Canada only1 For Other Destinations1 Installation Instructions This document


(2) Remove 5 Silver Screws.(3) Remove the Right Cover.

272APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness.(5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.

(6) Remove 7 Screws.(7) Remove the SC Cover.

(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324 connector on the SC PC Board.

Note:The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.

(9) Proceed with the installation of other options.If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.

(10) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(11) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

(12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes".

(13) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

273APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190)

8.3.1. Contents

Note:1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.3.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed

into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600).

2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.CAUTION!


Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key PS KEY1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions1 Adobe PostScript 3 Label1 License Agreement For USA and Canada only1 For Adobe PostScript Driver1 Installation Instructions This document



274APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324 connector on the SC PC Board.

Note:The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.




(12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes".

(13) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(14) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front Cover as illustrated.

275APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.4. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD19)8.4.1. Contents

8.4.2. Installation1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is

installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB (DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).

2. For UF-9000, V2.xxxxx or higher SC firmware is required. Update the Firmware referring to the Service Notes “Firmware Update”.

3. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.

CAUTION!Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

Qty. Description Part No. Remarks1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) See Note1 DC PCB DZEC1030511 HDD Bracket DZJC0003891 HDD Harness DZFP001565 Flat Cable1 DC Harness DZFP001566 Power Supply Cable1 Edge Saddle DZJK000057 Black-Square3 Harness Clamp (Small) DZJK000004 Black3 Harness Clamp (Medium) DZJK000067 White

6 Screw (Short) XTB3+4F

2 Screw (Medium) XTW3+6LFC

1 Firmware CD DZHP010773 For USA version only (UF-9000)1 Installation Instructions See Note This document


276APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190



(8) Remove 5 Silver Screws.(9) Remove the Left Cover.

277APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(10) Remove 2 Silver Screws.(11) Remove the Rear Cover.

(12) Connect the HDD Harness to the HDD.

Note:Make sure that the HDD Harness is connected to the HDD correctly as illustrated.

(13) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket as illustrated.

(14) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Short Screws (XTB3+4F).

Correct Incorrect

HDD

PCB Side

HDD

PCB Side

278APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
(15) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Small).(16) Install the DC PC Board.(17) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Medium Screws

(XTW3+6LFC).

(18) Install the HDD Assembly.(19) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Short Screws

(XTB3+4F).

(20) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Medium).(21) Connect one end of the HDD Harness to CN143

on the DC PC Board.(22) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness

Clamps.

(23) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).(24) Connect other end of the HDD Harness to

CN309 on the SC PC Board.(25) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness

Clamp.

279APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(26) Reinstall the SC Cover.(27) Secure the SC Cover with 7 Screws.Note:

Tuck the Ferrite Core into the SC Cover as illustrated.

(28) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Small), and Edge Saddle.

(29) Connect the DC Harness to CN141 connector on the DC PC Board, and route the Harness through a hole on the side of the machine.

(30) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness Clamps.

(31) Connect the DC Harness to the LVPS.

280APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
(32) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness Clamps.

(33) Reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.(34) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power

Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.


(36) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service Notes of this manual.

281APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
CAUTION!

<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.

1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.

2. Press "FUNCTION" and, "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard

Disk Drive Unit, and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position.5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect

the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down

procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power Off.

7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD19) is installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration from 200 to 1,000 Stations, and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD automatically.

Note:1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book

information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or RDS as backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the 200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).

3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch) procedure was not followed.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied, and transferred (using copy, and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:The size, and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book.When installing the PDMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the UF-9000/DP-180/190.1) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.2) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the UF-9000/DP-180/190.

b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:

282APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities.

2) Click on Network Device Locator.3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.4) In the menu bar, click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.5) The Network Address Book Editor "UF-9000/DP-180/190" window appears, under the Address

Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on

File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).7) Then click the OK button.

c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above.

d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "UF-9000/DP-180/190 (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).

e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b), and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data, and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.)

f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer, and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

283APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.5. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)8.5.1. Contents


8.5.2. InstallationCAUTION!


Qty. Description Part No. Remarks1 Expansion F-ROM Board DZEC1021372 PC Board Support DZJH0000841 Installation Instructions DZSM000756 This document




284APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190

(8) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower], if it was preinstalled.

(9) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 (Lower) on the SC PC Board.

(10) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board, and secure with the Supporters.

Note:The Program Extension F-ROM Board must always be installed into Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower] for the PCL or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.




285APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.6. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B)

8.6.1. Contents




Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Image MemoryDZEC102306 16 MBDZEC101919 64 MBDZEC102307 128 MB

1 Installation Instructions DZSM000757 This document



286APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on the SC PC Board as illustrated.

Note:Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.




287APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.7. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)8.7.1. Contents




Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Image MemoryUE-410047 4 MBUE-410048 8 MB

(1) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.

(2) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card as illustrated.

Caution:Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage to the card or machine.

(3) Reinstall the Cover.(4) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power



288APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
8.8. Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module (DA-DS188)8.8.1. Unpacking

Visually check the condition, and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before installation. Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.




Qty. Description Part No. Remarks1 2nd Paper Feed Module -----1 Bracket R PJULC0022Z1 Bracket L PJULC0023Z2 Bracket See Note2 Leg Cushion PJHRB0701Z

8 Silver Screw See Note

2 Screw See Note

1 Installation Instructions PJQMB0132Z This document


(2) Place the machine on top of the 2nd Paper Feed Module aligning with the 2 Guides.

289APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove the 2nd Paper Tray.

(4) Install the 2 Brackets from the rear side of the machine as illustrated.

(5) Secure the 2 Brackets with 2 Screws.

(6) Remove 6 Silver Screws.(7) Remove the 2 Rear Legs.

290APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190

(9) Install the Bracket L, and Bracket R as illustrated.

(10) Secure the 2 Brackets with 8 Silver Screws.

(11) Install the Leg Cushions underneath the Rear Legs.

(12) Install the 2 Rear Legs to 2nd Paper Feed Module.

(13) Secure the 2 Rear Legs with 6 Screws.

(14) Connect the Harness of the 2nd Paper Feed Module to the machine.

Note:Make sure the Connector is inserted securely as illustrated.

(15) Reinstall the 2nd Paper Tray.(16) Reinstall the Rear Paper Tray Cover.(17) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power



291APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(19) Load paper into the 2nd Paper Tray.Caution:

Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs, and that it does not exceed the Max. Level Indicator. You can load up to 550 sheets (20 lb / 75 g/m2).

292APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190
8.9. Installing the Handset Kit (UE-403171/UE-403172)8.9.1. Contents




Qty. Description Part No. Remarks1 Cradle Assembly See Note1 Handset See Note1 Handset Cord DZFN0000601 Installation Instructions DZSM000254 This document

(1) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into the holes on the Left Cover.

(2) Connect the Handset Cord to the Cradle Assembly, and the Handset as illustrated.

(3) Fasten the Cradle Assembly Cable onto the Hooks on the Rear Cover as illustrated.

(4) Remove the Protective Tab covering the HANDSET Jack on the Rear Cover.

(5) Connect the Cradle Assembly Cord.(6) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power



293APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.10. Installing the Mechanical Counter Kit (DZTQ000066)(Supplied as a Service Part)

8.10.1. Contents




Qty. Description Part No. Remarks1 Mechanical Counter DZTK0000021 MC Harness DZFP0015671 Counter Bracket DZJC0003903 Harness Clamp DZJK0000041 Screw XTW3+6L1 Installation Instructions DZSM000801 This document



294APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Install the Mechanical Counter to the MC Bracket.

(9) Connect the MC Harness to the Mechanical Counter.

295APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(10) Install 3 Harness Clamps.

(11) Install the Mechanical Counter.(12) Secure the Mechanical Counter with 1 Screw.(13) Secure the MC Harness with 3 Harness Clamps.(14) Connect the MC Harness to CN302 on the SC

PC Board.

(15) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.(16) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.(17) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power



296APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9 General Network Information9.1. Network Protocol9.1.1. OSI Reference ModeHaving a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.

The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.

7 Application

Layer Name Function Protocol

6 Presentation

5 Session

4 Transport

3 Network

2 Datalink

1 Physical

NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...

SMBSMTP

FTPDNS

HTTPTelnetetc...

TCP/IPIPX/SPX

Net BEUIApple Talk

etc...

EthernetToken Ring

FDDIATMetc...

TDI

TCP, UDP

IP, IPX, etc...

PPP...

IP Address etc...

MAC Address

RS-232C, X21...

ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

RepeaterHub

NICSW Hub

Router

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

297APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.1.2. ProtocolOne reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.

TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.

The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.

9.1.3. CableFor the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω. Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.

Category Purpose1 Voice grade telephone line2 ISDN3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)4 Token Ring (16M)5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI

Session, Presentation and Application layers. Protocols at this layer provide network services.

6 Presentation5 Session

4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer. Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork.

3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks.

2 Data Link Network Interface

Corresponds to the bottom two layers of the OSI model. This correspondence enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network.

1 Physical

Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

298APR 2006Ver. 3.0

http://www.ietf.org/

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.

9.2.2. Network ControlCSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) is a network control protocol. If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows:

Wait for the next available timing to send,Send out a frame,Perform collision sensing simultaneously,Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)

802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer.Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately.

Token PassingToken passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.

The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

XXXXXX XXXXXX

Unique valueManufacturer IDPCC : 080023

Most significant bitPre-amble8 byte

Destination MAC address6 byte

Source MAC address6 byte

Data type2 byte

Data 46 1500 byte

FCS 4 byte

Least significant bit

299APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame.

When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.

Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.

Token Frame Format

Data Frame Format

There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

Most significant bitStart De-limiter (SFD)1 byte

P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)1 byte

P: priorityS: Status

0 = Token Frame1 = Data Frame

R: Reserved


Most significant bitSFD1 byte

AccessControl1 byte

Framecontrol1 byte

DestinationMAC6 or 2 byte

SourceMAC6 or 2 byte

Data FCS4 byte

ED1 byte

FrameStatus1 byte

Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)Max 17779 (16M)


300APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.2.3. EthernetEthernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T)

Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)

10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)

100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

10 BASE 5

10 BASE - T

Logical speed(Mbps)

BASE : baseband (digital)BROAD: broadband (analog)

Max length (x 100m)

TP Twisted Pairhyphen "-" means type of cableno "-" means max length

Ethernet Configuration

301APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.

Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.

If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.

There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.

9.2.4. RepeaterThe main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions.

They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated.

Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.

9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

1 1

2 2

3 3

6 6

1 1

2 2

3 3

6 6Straight Cable Crossed Cable

TX (+)

TX (-)

RX (+)

RX (-)

TX (+)

TX (-)

RX (+)

RX (-)

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

"1" "0"

0 V

-2.05 V

302APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.3. Network Layer9.3.1. IP AddressAn IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses.

Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.

Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.

Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID.

There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:

Class A : First octet reserved for the network addressClass B : First two octets reserved for the network addressClass C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

0Class A

1Class B 0

1Class C 1

Network address represented as

0

303APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.3.2. Subnet MaskA subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.

1. Host address is set to all “0”2. Host address is set to all “1”

Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”

IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified. Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.

4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”Reserved for default route for non-destination address

5. Most significant bit starting with “127”Reserved for loop back address

1IP

192.168.32.1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0192

255 255255

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Subnet Mask255.255.255.0

NetworkAddress

192.168.32.0

IPSubnet Mask

Network Address Configuration

168 32 1

0

190.0.3.1255.255.255.0

190.0.3.2255.255.255.0

190.0.3.3255.255.255.0

190.0.2.1255.255.255.0

190.0.2.2255.255.255.0

190.0.2.3255.255.255.0

190.0.1.1255.255.255.0

190.0.1.2255.255.255.0

190.0.1.3255.255.255.0

GroundFloor

SecondFloor

ThirdFloor

Router

Global IPAddress190.0.0.0

255.255.0.0

NoteUpper: IP addressLower: Subnet mask

Class B Subnet Outline

304APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.3.3. Internet ProtocolThe IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.

It performs the following typical functions:1. Identifies the IP address2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram3. Routing of the IP address

Terms DetailVersion Currently version 4Internet Header Length

IP Header field length

Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence)

ID Identification frame number for upper layer communicationFlags Packet disassembly informationFragment Offset Offset from most significant bitTime To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the routerProtocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header dataSource Address Sender’s IP AddressDestination Address Destination’s IP AddressOption When implementedPadding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit

Version InternetHeader Length Type Of Service Total Length

4 byte

Fragment OffsetFlagsIDTime To Live Protocol Header Checksum

Source AddressDestination Address

Option + Padding (size varies)

Data

IP Datagram

305APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.3.4. RouterRouters, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address.

Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information.

These are the typical functions:

1. RoutingThis controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.

2. Packet FilteringThis performs the access and security control for specified routing.

3. Address ConversionNAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address.

4. IP Masquerade:This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer.

5. Designated ReplyThese are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all wellknown techniques to keep a live connection.

PC-A192.168.32.1/24

Router B

PC-B192.168.32.2/24

PC-C192.168.33.1/24

PC-D192.168.33.2/24

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

OKOK

permission denied permission denied

192.168.32/24

Packet Filtering Sample

192.168.33/24

306APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.4. Transport Layer9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.

The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

TCP Segment in IP Datagram

IP Header(20 byte)

Application Data(vary)

TCP segmentIP Datagram

TCP Header(20 byte)

TCP Segment Outline

Header Length(4 bit)

Reserved(6 bit)

Control Flag(6 bit) Window (6 byte)

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)Sequence Number (4 byte)

Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)

Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)Option PAD

Data (Segment)

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

307APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.

The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

SYN, Sequential No.=4538970

ACK, ACK No.=4538971

SYN, Sequential No.=1919424000

ACK, ACK No.=1919724001Server

Panasonic Device

Increments No. sequentially

TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart

Client

308APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.5. Upper Layer9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources.

Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:

Panasonic.comMail.panasonic.comifax.panasonic.com

can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.

Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device.

This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name.Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.

• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

DNS Server (root)

DNS Server(panasonic.com)

DNS Server (jp)

DNS Server (co.jp)

DNS Server(panafax.co.jp)

Mail Servermlsv.panafax.co.jp

domain

1

2

3

45

6 7

8

9

10

DNS Name Resolution Sample

Panasonic Device

309APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:1. Query the local DNS Server.2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.3. The “Com” root DNS Server sends the query to the “jp” root DNS Server.4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.

All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server.

9.5.2. Primary Name ServerA primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

9.5.3. Secondary Name ServerA secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.

310APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) RecordEach database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows:

IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>

An example of the syntax is shown below:

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.The following list explains the other parameters:* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]).* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authorized for: ;@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 7200 1209600 172800) ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ;

; refresh every 12 hours; retry after 2 hours; expire after 2 weeks; default ttl is 2 days

311APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.5.5. A (Address) RecordThe A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.

9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) RecordPointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.

They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:

<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>

9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) RecordThe CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:

<alias name> CNAME <host name>

Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy

$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.

IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212ifaxos01ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29

IN A 172.21.97.26

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.;

312APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.5.8. NS (Name Server) RecordThe Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below:<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>

An example of a name server record follows below:

@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp

The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name server.

9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) RecordThe Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:

<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>

For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

9.5.10. Reverse LookupThis is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.

9.5.11. ForwardingA Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands.There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly & Associates, Inc.

313APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel.

The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply.

The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://www.imc.org/rfc821

9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

SMTP Server

PCPC DNS Server POP Server

Internet

SMTP POP 3

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

Received: from nwr35 by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 for <[email protected]>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)Message-Id: <[email protected]>Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicFrom: "Panasonic" <[email protected]>Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

Delivery route

Message ID

Content-Type

314APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC23059.7.1. Mode of OperationThe Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.

Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.

Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.

9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender

Receiver

Required

Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S fileProvide notice in case of local transmission problemProvide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant

Strongly Recommended

Include Message-IDUse Base 64 encoding for image data

OptionalUse other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiverProvide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications

Required

Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than displayBe capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single messageProvide notice in case of reception or processing problems

Optional Use other TIFF Profiles

315APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)

9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations

RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

Required

Be SMTP compliantProvide delivery failure notificationBe able to process PSTN/FAX email addressComply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmissionAttempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminalsEnsure DSN for delivery failure notification

Strongly Recommended

Use DSN for delivery failure notificationUse an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users

OptionalTranslate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminalUse a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

IETF Internet Engineering Task ForceRFC Request For CommentMIME Multipurpose Internet Mail ExtensionsPOP3 Post Office Protocol version 3SMTP Simple Mail Transfer ProtocolDSN Delivery Status NotificationMDN Message Disposition NotificationTIFF Tagged Image File FormatIFD TIFF Image File DirectoryOfframp gateway

Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/G4 facsimile terminals

Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver

Notice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to be determined by the device

File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Sub-type Registration

RFC2302

Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile RFC2306

316APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.7.4. File Format for Internet FaxSending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.

Class Color Coding Method RemarksS B/W MH Internet Fax minimal setF B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full modeJ B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed modeC Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal setL Color JPEG (lossless,

grayscale)One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous tone color and grayscale images

M Color Mixed Raster Content

Multiple coders and resolution within a page

S (MH)

C (JPEG)

L (JPEG) M (MRC)

J(JBIG)

F(MMR, MR)

B/W Color

MRC: Mixed Raster Content

317APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.7.5. Minimal SetThe minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.

The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.

9.7.6. AddressingA simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services.

Baseline Fields ValuesBits Per Sample 1Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4Fill Order Least significant bit firstImage Width 1728 (A-4)Image Length N: total number of scan lines in imageNew Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page documentPage Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count mPhotometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means blackResolution Unit 2: inchRows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one stripSamples Per Pixel 1Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF stripStrip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF stripX Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)Extensions FieldsT4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs

byte aligned

FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com

FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com

Global-phoneService selector

DomainSub addressSelector

Global-phoneService selector

Service selectorGlobal-phone Domain

Domain

(1) Offramp

(2) Sub address

(3) Others

318APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words “MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”, “RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119

1. MUSTThis word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification.

2. MUST NOTThis phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification.

3. SHOULDThese words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course.

4. SHOULD NOTThis phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.

9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

HeaderIFD (Page 0)Long ValuesImage Data

(Page 0)

IFD (Page 1)Long ValuesImage Data

(Page 1)IFD (Page 2)

Strip Offset

Strip Offset

Next IFD Offset

Next IFD Offset

First IFD OffsetValue Offset

Value Offset

File Structure

319APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.7.8. Delivery FailureIn the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.

9.7.9. Image File FormatThe Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.

The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

Message Header Contents

320APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.8. Communication ProtocolsThe set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.

Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.

A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready

SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com

250 ef1.labo.pcc.com

MAIL FROM: <[email protected]>

250 OK

RCPT TO: <[email protected]>

250 OK

DATA

250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

DATA BLOCK 1

DATA BLOCK 2

DATA BLOCK n

CR/LF . CR/LF

250 OK

QUIT

221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing transmission channel

Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

[5 minutes]

[5 minutes]

[2 minutes]

[5 minutes]

[3 minutes]

[3 minutes]

[10 minutes]

SMTP Server(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

DAT

A B

LOC

KC

losi

ngS

MT

P C

omm

and

TCP 3 Way Handshake &

Opening Session

your Panasonic Device(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

321APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.8.1. Opening and ClosingAt the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing:

HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>QUIT:<CRLF>

In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.

9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.

9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.

9.8.4. Data (DATA)The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.

9.8.5. SendThis command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

9.8.6. Reset (RSET)This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.

9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP ServerSMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

322APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

211 System status or system help reply220 <domain> Service ready221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel250 Requested mail action okay# completed251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path> 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF> 421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel

[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox busy]451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage 500 Syntax error# command unrecognized

[This may include errors such as command line too long]501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments502 Command not implemented 503 Bad sequence of commands504 Command parameter not implemented550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]551 User not local; please try <forward-path>552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed

[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect] 554 Transaction failed

323APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)9.9.1. IntroductionOn certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time.The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939

9.9.2. Basic OperationInitially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.

Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.

Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.

A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed.

A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

324APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’ duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary

Note:With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply.

Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION statePASS stringQUIT

STAT valid in the TRANSACTION stateLIST [msg]RETR [msg]DELE [msg]NOOPRSETQUIT

Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state

TOP [msg] valid in the TRANSACTION stateUIDL [msg]

POP3 Replies:

+OK-ERR

From: To:

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

325APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

+OK POP Server ready<[email protected]>

your Panasonic Device(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

POP 3 Server(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

USER s50055

DELE 1

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

+OK Password required for s50055PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).STAT

+OK 2 126040

QUIT+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)+OK POP Server ready

<[email protected]>

USER s50055

+OK Password required for s50055

PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).TOP 1 1

+OK 69762 octetsText DATAText DATA

PETR 1+OK 69752 octets

Text DATAText DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

+OK Message 1 has been deleted.

DELE 2

TOP 2 1+OK 1 56288 octets

Text DATA

Text DATAPETR 2

+OK 1 56288 octetsText DATAText DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

+OK Message 2 has been deleted.

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

QUIT+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

326APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PCTroubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.

One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.

Note:Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

Command Sample PurposePing Ping 192.168.1.30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target

destination (192.168.1.30)

Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of Ipconfig/all

Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination(192.168.2.245)

Netstat NetstatNetstat -nr

Active connection listActive route for your subnet.All special assigned IP addresses are also shown

Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host NameNslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.

This command is available for Windows NT only.

327APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)

START

Is the LAN connected to an ISP

Is this a Dialup connection ?

Yes

Is static IP address available ?

No No

Is G3 Gateway function being used ?

Yes

No

Yes

Is POP account available ?

No

Yes

Set network parameters for SMTP receiving

Set network parameters for POP receiving

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ?

Is POP account available ?

Yes

Yes

Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device

Yes

No

No

No

No

DHCP Client?

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.

Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

If not readyIf not readyIf not ready

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ?

Important Notice:Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware ofhow the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may askthe Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changingthe configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.

328APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended FeatureDHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP.

DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.

DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address).In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.

"DHCP client"A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address.

"DHCP server"A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.

Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.

Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

Message UseDHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration

parameters.DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server

and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address.

DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address.

DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired

DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has

externally configured network address.

329APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.

DHCPOFFER

DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST

DHCPRELEASE

DHCPACK

DHCPDISCOVERDHCPDISCOVER

DHCPOFFER

(not selected)Server

(selected)Client Server

Commits configuration

Discards lease

Determinesconfiguration

Collects repliesSelects configuration

Begins initialization

Initialization complete

Graceful shutdown

Determinesconfiguration

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address

DHCPACK

DHCPREQUESTDHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

Server Client Server

Locates configuration

Begins initialization

Locatesconfiguration

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address

Initialization complete

Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored

330APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.

More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

T1 expires/Send

DHCPREQUESTto leasing server

INITIALIZATION

INITIALIZE/REBOOT

REBOOTING

SELECTING

REBINDINGREQUESTING

BOUND

RENEWING

-/Send DHCPREQUES

DHCPNAK/Restart

DHCPOFFER/Discard

DHCPACK/Record lease, set

timers T1, T2

T1 expires/Send DHCPREQUEST

to leasing server

DHCPNAK/Discard offer

DHCPACK(not accepted)/

Send DHCPDECLINE

DHCPOFFER/Collect replies

-/Send DHCPDISCOVER

DHCPNAK, Lease expired/Halt network

Select offer/send DHCPREQUEST


/timers T1,T2DHCPACK/

Record lease, set/timers T1,T2


timers T1, T2

T2 expires/Broadcast

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPNAK/Halt network

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client’s lease will expire.To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

331APR 2006Ver. 3.0

http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended FeatureThe confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.

(1) Delivery confirmation (required)(2) Additional document features (optional)

In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.Your Panasonic device supports MDN.

Delivery Status Notification (DSN)A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.

SMTP Server SMTP ServerDSN

N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre

fail

SMTP Server SMTP Server MDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed

332APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.

Additional Document CapabilitiesSection 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.

(1) RequestIf the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.

SMTP Server SMTP Server

(1)

(2)(3)

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging

Internet FAXInternet FAX

Read Receipt

Capabilities

MDN Request

MDN Response

333APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(2) Recipient's MDN ResponseRecipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.

Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicContent-Transfer-Encoding: 7bitDate: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500Message-Id: <[email protected]>From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <[email protected]>Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: <[email protected]>Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicContent-Transfer-Encoding: 7bitDate: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500Message-Id: <[email protected]>From: <[email protected]>Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: <[email protected]>References: <[email protected]>Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

********** Read Receipt **********

This message was opened by ’[email protected]’ dd Mmm yyyy 15:42

******************************************

Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected]: <[email protected]>Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatchedMedia-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

MDN Response Sample

BODYTEXT

MESSAGEHEADER

ATTACHEDFILE

334APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Processing ConfirmationThe processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.

To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

335APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended FeatureThe protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure.

It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that “http” & “html” are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.

From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature

The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.

Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.

An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality.

A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:

<process-ID.clock@hostname>

where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.

336APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name'' parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.

When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.

Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

Client Server

+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)

+OK 1

STAT

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)

+OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]>

APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fbDigest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD<[email protected]>PASSWD

Produces a 16 octet digest value ofc4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

Challenge Response<[email protected]>

Possible Responses: +OK -ERR permission denied

Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

337APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature

SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply.

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

Client Server

250-smtp.example.com

250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5

AUTH CRAM-MD5

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)

220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready

EHLO jgm.example.com

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

334PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

235 Authentication successful

SMTP AUTH overview

Genrates Digest parameterChallenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:USER

Produces a Challenge

334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=Challenge Response

BASE64 decoded string

BASE64 encoded string

Fred

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

<[email protected]>

9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e

338APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply.

If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.

The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".

Error CodesThe following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.

432: A password transition is needed

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism.

538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.

454: Temporary authentication failure

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure.

530: Authentication required

This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

339APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended FeatureDirect Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the DNS Server. For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled in the General Settings (For Key Operator).Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's Intranet.

Several new service extensions were assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command

Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview

Sender RecipientEstablish TCP connection

TCP Port No. 25

Checks for Capability

250-<[email protected]> recipient ok250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)250- (MRC-mode=0)250- (color=Binary)250- (|(&(dpi=204)250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )250- (&(dpi=200)250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )250- (&(dpi=400)250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )250- (size-x<=2150/254)250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )250 (ua-media=stationery) )

Capability contents sample

Request for Capability

220

250

EHLO

250 Response of CONNEG

250 Capacity Exchange

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

MAIL FROM:<[email protected]>

RCPT TO:<[email protected]> CONNEG

340APR 2006Ver. 3.0

UF-9000
DP-180/190
memo

341APR 2006Ver. 3.0

APR 2006

UF-9000DP-180/190

10 Schematic Diagram10.1. General Circuit Diagram

+24V

IR

24V

GN

D

24V

GN

D

nC

HG

CT

Ln

DB

CH

nD

B

nT

RC

TL

nT

R

+5V

nT

EC

TL

CN008

CN501

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+24V

24V

GN

D

CN006

1 2 3+2

4VIR

Front Cover SafetyInterlock SW

+5V

N.C

.

CN003

1 2 3+5

V(L

D)

ProcessInterlock SW

ND

ND

GS

EN

nTO

PS

EN

CN401

5

1 2 3 4 5

+5V

SP

5VG

ND

5VG

ND

nE

XIT

SE

N

CN015

CN402

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

SE

N

ND

CN451

1 2

5VG

ND

PN

ON

CN016

CN450

1 2 3

1 2 3+5

VS

P

nA

DU

ST

nV

IDE

O

nL

DO

N

5VG

ND

+5V

(LD

)

CN002

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5VG

ND

nH

SY

NC

24V

GN

D

nM

OE

N_O

PC

LO

CK

_OP

+24V

nP

UC

TL

_OP

CN004

CN452

nO

PT

ION

+5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

nP

ON

_OP

5VG

ND

LSU

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NP

UR

GE

NR

ES

NH

SY

NC

GN

D

NV

IDE

O

GN

D

NS

BS

Y

ZC

IN

NTO

P

Low TonerSensor

Registration/Paper Detect Sensor

Paper Exit/ADU

Paper Jam Sensor

No PaperSensor Laser

Diode

2nd Paper Feed Module I/F

HVPS

Engine Control

FAN

PE

R24

VG

ND

CN018

1 2 3FA

NN

ER

R

M

FanMotor

1 2 3

+24V

IR

+24V

IR

CN017

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

24V

GN

D

24V

GN

D

nM

MC

TL

nM

ML

D

nM

MH

AL

F

Main Motor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

M

CN010

LSU Motor

M

SO

L_C

TL

ND

ExitSolenoid

1 2

OL

_CT

L

ND

Pick UpSolenoid

1 2

EX

ITS

OL

_CT

L

24V

GN

D

N.C

RegistrationSolenoid

1 2

12

11 12 13

pin)

nS

NR

CL

K

nS

NR

LD

nS

NR

CT

L

24V

GN

D

+24V

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

2ndFeeder

24V

GN

D

nM

OE

N_O

P

CL

OC

K_O

P

+24V

nP

UC

TL

_OP

CN453

CN602

nO

PT

ION

+5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

nP

ON

_OP

5VG

ND

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

GND

GND

+24V

+24V

+12V

+12V

VCC(+5VDC)

INV-SW-1

CDSCLK2

CCD-TG

GND

CCDCLK1

AFE-SEN

ADCLK

GND

AFE-SCK

P10

3

P60

3

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

DB7

MODE-SW

DB5

DB6GND

DB4

CCD-RS

AFE-SDI

CCD-CK2

GND

CCD-CK1

DB3

DB2

DB1

DB0

CCD-CP

+24V

+24V

GND

GND

+12V

GND

+5V

+5VP

nBOOK

nAPNT

nSCNRST

P10

2

CN

304

1234567891011

1234567891011

VBUS

D-

D+

GND

P10

1

CN

305

USB I/F

1234

1234

P601

CN1

1 2 3

1 2 3

+24V

INV

_SW

GN

D

P10

6

1234

VCC

GND

GND

HOME

Ho

me

Det

ect

Sen

sor

CN2

1 4L

AM

P

AD

F_P

AP

ER

_S2

GN

D

GN

D

VC

C(+

5VD

C)

PA03

1 2 3 4

RegistrationSensor

AD

F_P

AP

ER

_S1

GN

D

GN

D

+5V

P

PA02

1 2 3 4Paper Sensor

P10

4

PA04

123456789101112131415161718

123456789101112131415161718

+24V

ADF_PAPER-S2-2

+24V

ADF_MOTOR_MODE-2

VCC(+5VDC)ADF_CLUTCH-2

GND

ADFPH0-1

GND

ADFPH1-1

ADF_PAPER-S3-2

ADF_COVER-2

ADFPH2-1

ADF_PAPER-S1-2

ADF_ON_LINE

ADF_STAMP-2

+5VP

ADFPH3-1

AD

F

SP

C (

SC

AN

NE

R)

CC

DIN

VE

RT

ERP

105

1234

Sca

nn

erM

oto

r

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

1234

M

GND

ADF_STAMP

PA081

2

So

len

oid

12

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

PA01

1234

1234

M

PA051

2

ADF_COVER

GNDC

over

Sen

sor

2nd FeederMotor

M

+24V

+24V

A NA

B

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6N

B

CN600

PU

SO

L_C

TL

1

+24V

CN601

1 2

Pick UpSolenoid

1 2

*1 : Japan specification only

Drawing NameGeneral Circuit

Diagram

Model

UF-9000DP-180/190

2nd Paper Feed Module

(OPTION)

120 / 220-240 VAC+24 VDC+12 VDC+5 VDC+3.3 VDC

G

L

N

InletPowerCord

PowerSW

FG FG

G

L

N

InletPowerCord

PowerSW

120 VAC 220-240 VAC

PARTS WITH A MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY. WHEN SERVICING, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED PARTS ARE USED FOR THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS IDENTIFIED WITH A MARK IN THE SCHEMATIC.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

342Ver. 3.0

CN302

+24V

KC

CN

T

MECHANICALCOUNTER(OPTION)

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

+24V

+5V

P

GN

D

GN

D

EB

C3D

[0]

EB

C3D

[1]

EB

C3D

[2]

EB

C3D

[3]

EB

C3D

[4]

EB

C3D

[5]

EB

C3D

[6]

EB

C3A

[20]

EB

C3A

[26]

EB

C3A

[27]

EB

C3A

[28]

EB

C3A

[29]

CN330

CN110

EB

C3A

[30]

EB

C3A

[31]

nF

XB

SE

T

nF

XB

WU

P

BZ

CL

K

nE

BC

WB

E[0

]

EB

C3D

[7]

EB

C3A

[22]

EB

C3A

[23]

EB

C3A

[24]

EB

C3A

[25]

nE

BC

OE

nM

DM

INT

nC

SM

ON

nM

DM

RS

T

EB

C3A

[21]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

nH

KO

F5V

pC

ML

D

+5V

B

+3.3

V

n5V

MTO

N

nM

VO

L0

nM

VO

L1

nM

VO

L2

CN

114

12

SP

EA

KE

R

12

T2

T1

CN

112

EX

T. T

EL

34

T2

N.C.

L2(T)

L1(R)

N.C.

T1

CN

111

LIN

E

123456

FXB

CN

113

HA

ND

SE

T(O

PT

ION

)

34T2

T1

+5V

5VG

5VG

nR

E

CN014

1 2 3 4

nT

E

5VG

CN009

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

nF

CT

L

+5V

GN

D

+5V

24V

GN

D

24V

GN

D

+24V

+24V

CN005

CN301

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

PS

AV

E

ZC

IN

N.C

.

N.C

.

N.C

.

NP

RD

Y

NC

BS

Y

CN001

CN308

NP

RIN

T

GN

D

SX

D

GN

D

CC

LK

GN

D

CX

D

GN

D

RE

G

24V

G

CN012

1 2

PU

S

24V

G

CN011

1 2

CN013

1 2 3

2 1FD

D87

21

DC

GND

DASP

ATCS0

ATCS1

ATA2

ATA0

N.C.

ATA1

IO16

ATAINT

GND

N.C.

GND

N.C.

N.C.

GND

CN

309

ATD15

ATD0

ATD14

ATD1

ATD13

ATD2

N.C.

GND

ATIRD

GND

ATIOWR

ATD12

ATD3

ATD11

ATD4

ATIORDY

41424344

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

ATD8

ATD7GNDATRST

ATD10

ATD5

ATD9

ATD6

3456789101112131415

+5V

+5V

GND

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

CN

143

HD

D(O

PT

ION

)

CN331

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN

322

LA

N I/

F

123456789101112

TXD+

TXD-

+3.3V

GND

GND

CT1

RXD+

RXD-

YLA

YLK(GND)

GLK(GND)

GLA

1234

CN

311

VBUS

D-

D+

GND

US

B

PR

INT

ER

I/F

F-ROM CARD I/F (68 pin)

F-ROMCARD

CN329

SDRAM I / F (72

SORTMEMORY

CN310

+24V

+24V

+24V

GN

DG

ND

+5V

+5V

+3.3

V

+3.3

V

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

CN300

CN101

+5V

P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

nM

PO

W1

ZC

IN

nF

CT

L

Live: Brown

LVPSGND

+24V

CN

141

3

1

12345

CN

102

SC

Neutral: Blue

FRM SLOT2 (60 pin)

FRM

CN328 *1

FRM SLOT1 (60 pin)

FRM

CN327

I/F (8 pin)

HARDWAREKEY

CN324

STA

MP

AD

F M

oto

r

123C

N1

SC

N[0

]

LE

DC

T2

LE

DC

T3

LE

DC

T4

LE

D3

LE

D4

LE

D5

BA

T+

LE

D0

LE

D1

LE

D2

SC

N[1

]

SC

N[2

]

KIN

3K

IN4

KIN

5

KIN

6G

ND

6 8 16 14 12 10 4 2 13 15 17 1 3 5 7 9 11 18

CN230

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CN264

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN261

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+24V

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

+5V

P+5

V

PN

LR

XD

PN

LTX

D

pP

NL

RS

T

nS

LP

KY

nL

PO

W1

nW

AK

EU

P

BZ

CL

K

GN

DG

ND

nB

OO

K

CN220

CN306

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

RE

SE

TB

CS

B1

RW

_WR

D

RS

DB

0

E_R

DB

DB

2

DB

1

DB

4

DB

3

DB

6

DB

5

VD

D

DB

7

VS

S

Vc1

C2+

C1+

V1

C2-

V3

V2

V0

V4

HP

MB

PS

C4+

VO

UT

C1-

C3+

LCD

CN223

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SC

N[4

]

SC

N[5

]

SC

N[3

]

SC

N[6

]

KIN

3

N.C

.

KIN

2

KIN

7

KIN

1

KIN

0

CN232

CN262

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

KIN

4

nB

oo

k

KIN

5

KIN

3

KIN

6

KIN

2

KIN

7

KIN

1

SC

N[1

1]

KIN

0

SC

N[1

0]

SC

N[8

]

SC

N[9

]

N.C

.

GN

DGN

D

CN234

CN255

+DA

T

N.C

.

+AL

MS

CN

[5]

+AC

TS

CN

[6]

nL

ED

AL

M

LE

DC

T0

nL

ED

AT

LE

D9

LE

DC

T4

LE

D8

LE

DC

T3

nL

ED

AC

T

SC

N[7

]

LE

D7

LE

DC

T2

LE

DC

T1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CN233

CN252

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 p

in

CN

221

BAT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

+SL

P

nL

ED

SL

P

nS

LP

KY

GN

D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LE

DC

T1

nS

CN

DO

R

LE

D6

SC

N[2

]

SC

N[0

]S

CN

[1]

LE

DC

T0

N.C

.

CN231

CN25612345

12345

LEDCT0LED8

LED9

KIN4

KIN6

CN

263

CN

251PNL4

PNL1

PNL2 PNL3

PNL5

CN257

1 2

Scanner DoorSensor

123456

123456

CN

253

CN

254

DATA ACTIVEALARM

CN

007

12

+5VTH

21

Thermistor

FUSERUNIT

LAMP

CN

2 321

NC

ACN

ACL

TST TST

TH

(QWERTY Keys)

(10 Keys)

(PNL CPU)

APR 2006

UF-9000DP-180/190

memo

343Ver. 3.0

DZSD001829-13

88

Panasonic®

Software

Operating Instructions

Network Firmware Update Tool (Service Tool) Version 3

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Page 2

Table of Contents

1. General 3 1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2. Installation 4 2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4 2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4 2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6 3.1.2 For other models 6

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7

1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1

3rd Edition : 2002 December 5

4th Edition : 2003 April 10


6th Edition : 2003 December 18


8th Edition : 2004 August 3


10th Edition : 2004 October 22

11th Edition : 2005 March 18


13th Edition : 2006 Maｙ 08

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright © 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.


Page 3

1. General The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.

1.1 Supporting OS

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS • Windows 98 / Me • Windows NT 4.0 • Windows 2000 • Windows XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.

.


Page 4

2. Installation 2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

3. Enter the installation password. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.

4.

Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

5. The completion message is displayed when the installation is completed. Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network Firmware Update, then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.

2. The Configuration dialog box appears.

General Tab

Please change the settings if necessary.

File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode When you select this mode, the tool acquires the type of firmware and version from the device(s) of the specified address, and updates the device to the latest version from the “Local Firmware Folder”.

However, this mode cannot change the type of firmware, so you must use the manual mode when changing from the standard firmware to the option firmware.

3. Click [OK] to finish the setup.


Page 5

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.

Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update, then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.

3.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

4.

The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed.


Page 6

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.1.2 For other models

1. If the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) is changed from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication. For the 3-digit Key Operator Password devices, only the first three digits “000” of the default value are singled out of the 4-digit “0000” value.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)


Page 7

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 1. Please close all applications that are currently running.

Note: When using the Network Firmware Update Tool on Windows 2000/XP OS, you must be logged on as an Administrator.

2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.

Click [Next>].

Note:

1) Make sure the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) on the remote unit and the password on this application are set correctly.

2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...). 3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote

unit, or a communication error may occur. 4) Do not operate, or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the

firmware update will fail, and the device will not boot up again. 5) If the Network Firmware Update fails, and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than

20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the Local Firmware Update Tool, or with the FROM card.

3. Click [Device Address List].


Page 8

4. Enter the destination device(s) by using Manual Input, or Device Address List.

Click [OK].

5. Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [Next>].


Page 9

6. Specify the Firmware Code File using the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 6a1 With this choice you can directly select the Firmware Code Archive File. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically, and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 6b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly from here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select Independent File Folders --> Step 6c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select independent file folders from here.

Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 is not shown.

6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.


Page 10

6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file, and

click [Open].

Ex: DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe

6a3 Extracting...

6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].

6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 11

6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)", and click [Browse...] button.

6b2 Select the Parent File Folder, and Click [OK].

Ex: \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228

6b3 Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].


Page 12

6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders", and click [Browse...] button.

6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder, and

click [OK].

Ex: SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN


Page 13

6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder, and click [OK].

6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.

Click [Next>].


Page 14

8. Verify that the information you want to update is correct.

Then click [Next>].

Note: If "Send at once" is checked, all firmware will be sent at once, and then erase, write and reboot. If "Send at once" is checked out, each firmware (SC, PNL, SPC, etc...) are transmitted separately, and each time the unit erases, writes and reboots in the normal mode. This "Send at once", function cannot be used if the model is DP-6010 / 4510 / 3510, firmware type is PCL or PS, and the unit SC version is V1.xxxx.

9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.

Then click [Next>].

10. Data is transferred to the Spooler, and the

update is started.

The Spooler screen appears automatically showing the progress of the data transfer.

The spooler will take time to open depending on the number of addresses to update.


Page 15

11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in the spooler disappear, and the communication log is displayed.

Click [Finish] to close the tool.

After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again automatically.

Published in Japan

DZSD000965-16

Panasonic®

Software

Operating Instructions

Local Firmware Update Tool (Service Tool) Version 3

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

Page 2

Table of Contents

1. General 3 1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2. Installation 4 2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4 2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4 2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5 2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7 3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8

1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30

3rd Edition : 2000 September 8

4th Edition : 2000 November 28

5th Edition : 2001 June 20

6th Edition : 2001 September 7



9th Edition : 2003 December 18

10th Edition : 2004 January 19

11th Edition : 2004 February 10




15th Edition : 2004 October 22


Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Page 3

1. General The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface.

1.1 Supporting OS

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS

• Windows 98 / Me

• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)

• Windows 2000 / XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models Please refer to the service manual of each model.


Page 4

2. Installation 2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine

1 Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed. Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.

2 Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and your PC.

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1 Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2 Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.

3 Installation Destination Folder

Click [Next] button.

4 Program Folder

Click [Next] button.


Page 5

5 Copying...

6 The installation is completed.

Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)

1 After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed automatically.

Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service Manual.

2 Searching...

Installing driver...

3 When the install screen disappears, the installation of the Firmware Update (USB) Driver is completed.

Note: 1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS. 2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be

displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation

3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1

4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.


Page 6

2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.

Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.

3.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

4.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.

Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be deleted properly.


Page 7

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)


Page 8

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

1 Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel cable or USB cable.

Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver installation.

2 Please close the all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

3 From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard.

Click [Next>].

Note: Please close all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

4 Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or Parallel.

Click [Next>].

Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is only displayed if you installed it with the unit Plug and Play.

Port ControllerStatus Monitor


Page 9

5 Specify the Firmware Code File by the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 5a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 5b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select an Independent File --> Step 5c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select an independent file here. When updating multiple firmware files, you must repeat the file selection operation.

5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe

5a3 Extracting...


Page 10

5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 11

5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327

5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].


Page 12

5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 13

5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click [Browse...] button.

5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].

ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 14

6 The selected Firmware Code File(s) are indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need to transfer a file.

On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.

Click [Next>].

7 The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

When there is more than one file to be updated, the operation will be the following;

For USB connected unit: they are transferred in turn automatically if the unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file.

Note: If you are updating the DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn't done automatically. The "Waiting..." display on the PC will not advance to "Executing..." until you set the unit back to USB Firmware Update on the machine to start receiving the next file. See Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode on the next page.

For Parallel connected unit: the confirmation screen is displayed when the current firmware code file transfer is finished and there are remaining firmware code files. Click [OK] when the machine is ready to receive the next file.


Page 15

Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the firmware update. When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.

For USB Connected Unit (Other models): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the firmware update automatically. When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.

For Parallel Connected Unit: Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.

8 When the transfers of all the firmware files are finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.

Note: For USB Connected Unit only. When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup. Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug and Play window.

Published in Japan